Owners Manual

XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T09:01:09+02:00; Page 1 evastarck

OWNERSVOLVO XC60 MANUAL

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%+%&:c\a^h]!6I%-(*!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 1 evastarck

DEAR VOLVO OWNER

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements. In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual. This insert is printed on recycled paper. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 2 evastarck

Table of contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 6 Seatbelts ...... 16 Remote control key/key blade...... 42 Volvo and the environment...... 10 Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)...... 19 Battery replacement, remote control key/ Activating/deactivating the airbag*...... 22 PCC*...... 47 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ...... 24 Keyless drive*...... 48 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 26 Locking/unlocking...... 50 WHIPS ...... 27 Child safety locks...... 55 Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS...... 29 Alarm*...... 56 When the systems deploy ...... 30 Safety mode...... 31 00 Child safety01...... 32 02

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 3 evastarck

Table of contents

Built-in phone*...... 197

03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Instruments and controls...... 62 Menus and messages...... 116 Key positions...... 70 Climate control...... 121 Seats...... 72 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- Steering wheel...... 76 senger compartment heater*...... 129 Lighting...... 77 Fuel-driven additional heater*...... 132 Wipers and washing...... 86 Audio system...... 133 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 89 Trip computer...... 147 Power panorama roof*...... 93 Compass*...... 149 Starting the engine...... 95 DSTC – Stability and traction control system...... 150 Starting the engine – external battery...... 97 Adapting driving characteristics...... 151 Gearboxes...... 98 Cruise control*...... 152 All-wheel drive – AWD*...... 102 Adaptive cruise control*...... 153 Foot brake...... 103 Distance Alert...... 159 Hill Descent Control - HDC*...... 105 03 City04 Safety™...... 162 04 Parking brake...... 107 Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...... 167 HomeLink EU*...... 110 Driver Alert System – DAC*...... 173 Driver Alert System - LDW*...... 176 Park assist syst*...... 179 Parking camera*...... 182 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 185 Comfort inside the passenger compartment...... 189 Bluetooth handsfree*...... 192

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 4 evastarck

Table of contents

05 During your journey 06 Maintenance and 07 Alphabetical Index Recommendations during driving...... 204 specifications Alphabetical Index...... 277 Refuelling...... 206 Engine compartment...... 226 Fuel...... 207 Lamps...... 231 Loading...... 210 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 238 Cargo area...... 211 Battery...... 240 Warning triangle...... 215 Fuses...... 243 Driving with a trailer...... 216 Wheels and tyres...... 251 Towing and recovery...... 222 Car care...... 263 Type designations...... 267 Specifications...... 269 05 Type06 approval...... 276 07

4 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 5 evastarck

Table of contents

5 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 6 evastarck

Introduction

Important information

Reading the Owner's Manual Option Footnote All types of option/accessory are marked with There is footnote information in the owner's Introduction an asterisk . manual that is located at the bottom of the A good way of getting to know your new car is page. This information is an addition to the text to read the owner's manual, ideally before your The range of options/accessories for the dif- that it refers to via a number. If the footnote first journey. This will give you the opportunity ferent car models varies depending on the mar- refers to text in a table then letters are used to familiarise yourself with new functions, to ket. The majority of options are factory fitted instead of numbers for referral. see how best to handle the car in different sit- and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret- uations, and to make the best use of all the rofitted. Message texts car's features. Please pay attention to the Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more There are displays in the car that show text safety instructions contained in the manual. information. messages. These text messages are high- The equipment described in the owner's man- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the ual is not present in all cars . In addition to Special texts text being slightly larger and printed in grey. standard equipment, this manual also Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- describes options (factory fitted equipment) WARNING sage texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings). and certain accessories (retrofitted extra Warning texts advise of a risk of personal equipment). If you are uncertain over what is injury. Labels standard, an option or an accessory then con- The car contains different types of label which tact your Volvo dealer. IMPORTANT are designed to convey important information Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require- in a simple and clear manner. The labels in the ments of different markets, as well as for Important texts advise of a risk of material car have the following descending degree of national or local legal requirements and regu- damage. importance for the warning/information. lations. The specifications, design features and illus- NOTE trations in this owner's manual are not binding. NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate We reserve the right to make modifications the use of features and functions for exam- without prior notice. ple. © Volvo Car Corporation

6 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 7 evastarck

Introduction

Important information

Warning for personal injury Risk of property damage Information

G031596 G031597 G031600

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, White ISO symbols and white text/image on White ISO symbols and white text/image on white text/image on black message field. Used black or blue warning field and message field. black message field. to indicate the presence of danger which, if the Used to indicate the presence of danger which, warning is ignored, may result in serious per- if the warning is ignored, may result in damage Procedure lists sonal injury or fatality. to property. Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual. When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant. Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a movement.

7 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 8 evastarck

Introduction

Important information

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- Recording data Laser sensor step instructions then the different steps are The driving and safety systems in the car use This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which numbered with normal numbers. computers which check and share information transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to with each other on the car's function. One or follow the prescribed instructions when han- Position lists more of these computers may store informa- dling the laser sensor. Red circles containing a number are used tion on the systems they check during normal in overview images where different com- The following two labels relate to the laser sen- driving, during the course of a collision or near- ponents are pointed out. The number sor: collision. Stored information may be used by: recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes • Volvo Car Corporation the item. • Service or repair workshops Bulleted lists • Police or other authorities A bulleted list is used when there is a list of • Other parties who claim legal entitlement points in the owner's manual. for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to Example: access the information. • Coolant • Engine oil Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of G033853 To be continued accessories can negatively affect the car's `` This symbol is located furthest down to the electrical system. Certain accessories only • The upper label describes the laser light's right when a section continues on the following function when their associated software is classification, Invisible Laser radiation – Do page. installed in the car's computer system. Always not view directly with optical instruments contact an authorised Volvo workshop before (magnifiers) – Class 1M laser product. installing accessories which are connected to This text is printed in the next warning box. or affect the electrical system. • The lower label describes the laser light's physical data: IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to

8 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 9 evastarck

Introduction

Important information

Laser Notice No. 50, dated WARNING glass, microscope, lens or similar opti- July 26th, 2001. cal instruments. If any of these instructions are not followed The physical data is specified in the following then there is a risk of eye injury! • The laser sensor transmits laser light table and other text is printed in the next warn- when the remote control key is in posi- ing box. • Testing, repair, removal, adjustment tion II and also with the engine switched and/or replacement of the laser sen- off (see page 70 on key positions). Radiation data for the laser sensor sor's spare parts must only be carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ For more information on the laser sensor, see • To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, page 164. Maximum average output 45 mW do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified Pulse duration 33 ns here. Owner's manual on the Internet Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° • The repairer must follow specially At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- cal) drawn up workshop information for the mation concerning your car. laser sensor. • Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury. • The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen. • The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in. • Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying

9 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 10 evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- EPI (Environmental Product Information) is Efficient emission control ration's core values which influence all opera- supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- tions. We also believe that our customers share how the environment is affected during the cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that our consideration for the environment. entire lifecycle of the car. encompasses a clean interior environment as Your Volvo complies with strict international Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI. well as highly efficient emission control. In environmental standards and is also manufac- many cases the exhaust emissions are well tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- Fuel consumption below the applicable standards. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- Clean air in the passenger compartment ration has global ISO certification, which in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel A passenger compartment filter prevents dust includes the environmental standard ISO consumption generally results in lower emis- and pollen from entering the passenger com- 14001 covering all factories and several of our sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. partment via the air intake. other units. We also set requirements for our It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- partners so that they work systematically with sumption. For more information read under the A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- environmental issues. heading, Reducing environmental impact. rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 11 evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic Volvo workshops and the environment • Remove unnecessary items from the car. outside. Regular maintenance creates the conditions The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption. The system consists of an electronic sensor for a long service life and low fuel consumption and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- for your car. In this way you contribute to a • If the car is equipped with an engine block tored continuously and if there is an increase cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops heater, always use it before starting from in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as are entrusted with the service and mainte- cold. This reduces fuel consumption and carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- exhaust emissions. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, tem. We make clear demands regarding the • Drive gently and avoid braking too hard. way in which our workshops are designed in queues and tunnels for example. Drive in the highest gear possible. Low order to prevent spills and discharges into the • The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone engine speeds result in lower fuel con- environment. Our workshop staff have the sumption. and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon knowledge and the tools required to guarantee filter. good environmental care. • Use engine braking to slow down. • Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention Textile standard Reducing environmental impact to local regulations. Switch off the engine The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- You can easily help reduce environmental when stationary for longer periods. sant and comfortable, even for people with impact, for example, by driving economically Always dispose of environmentally hazar- contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. • and by servicing and maintaining the car dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in Extreme attention has been given to choosing according to the instructions in the owner's an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- environmentally-compatible materials. This manual. tain about disposal, consult an authorised means that they also fulfil the requirements in Volvo workshop for advice. the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance The following advice will help you to do your bit towards a healthier passenger compartment for the environment: (for further advice on how • Service your car regularly. environment. you can reduce environmental impact and • High speed increases consumption con- drive economically, see page 204). siderably due to increased wind resis- Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- Decrease fuel consumption by choosing tance. A doubling of speed increases wind pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the • ECO tyre pressure, see page 261. resistance 4 times. upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning with plant substances and fulfils the certifica- • A roof load and ski box increase air resis- These hints will help reduce fuel consumption tion requirements. tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. without increasing travel time or lessening the Remove them directly after use. enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

11 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 12 evastarck

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

your car, you'll be saving money - and the Earth's resources.

12 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 13 evastarck

Introduction

13 14 evastarck XC60 (Y413);9;3 * Option/accessory, formoreinformation, seeIntroduction. Airbag system(SRS- 16 ...... Seatbelts Side airbags(SIPS Activating/deactivating theairbag Child safety 31 Safety mode...... 30 When thesystemsdeploy...... Roll-Over ProtectionSystem- 27 ...... WHIPS 26 Inflatable Curtain(IC)...... 32 ...... bags) Airbag) ...... 24 ...... 19 ...... OS...... 29 ROPS...... 22 *...... 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page14

G020871 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 15 evastarck

SAFETY 01 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 16 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose. The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn: WARNING • if it is pulled out too quickly Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo work- • during braking and acceleration shop. • if the car leans heavily. If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, Keep in mind the following the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some • do not use clips or anything else that can of the protective characteristics of the seat- prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly belt may have been lost, even if it appears Heavy braking can have serious consequences ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or to be undamaged. In addition, replace the if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all • caught on anything seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The passengers use their seatbelts. new seatbelt must be type-approved and • the hip strap must be positioned low down intended for installation in the same position It is important that the seatbelt lies against the (not over the abdomen) as the replaced seatbelt. body so it can provide maximum protection. tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling Do not lean the backrest too far back. The • the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre- seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal ceding illustration. seating position. Putting on a seatbelt WARNING Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this indicates that the seatbelt has locked. may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat.

16 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 17 evastarck

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

Seatbelts and pregnancy tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- • Provides information on which seatbelts ble between their abdomen and the steering are being used in the rear seat. The mes- wheel. sage is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are being used or when a rear door is opened. The message is Seatbelt reminder automatically cleared after approx. 30 seconds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the direction indicator lever's READ button. • Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on

G020998 the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops The seatbelt should always be worn during when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn also be acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button. in the correct way. The diagonal section should G017726 wrap over the shoulder then be routed between The message on the information display show- the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- The lap section should lay flat over the thighs their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual able. Press the READ button to see stored and as low as possible under the abdomen. – reminder. The audio reminder is speed messages. It must never be allowed to ride upward. dependent, and in some cases time depend- Certain markets Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind that it fits close to the body. In addition, check console and the combined instrument panel. the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers reminder system. the first 6 seconds. should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the Rear seat vehicle as they drive (which means that they The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two must be able to easily operate the foot pedals subfunctions: and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

17 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 18 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten- sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.

18 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 19 evastarck

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

Warning symbol on the combined WARNING Overview, airbag system instrument panel If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in the SRS system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately. 0 1 o

As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the information display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, G018665 G021010 the warning triangle illuminates and SRS SRS system, left-hand drive. Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag The airbag system is continuously monitored Service urgent appears in the display. Con- by the system's control module. The warning tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi- symbol in the combined instrument panel illu- ately. minates when the remote control key is in position II or III. The symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault- free. G018666

SRS system, right-hand drive. The SRS system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

19 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 20 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates Airbag on the driver's side when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer-

ence in the airbag system could cause mal- G021013 function and result in serious personal injury. Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- G021011 hand drive car. The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental NOTE Restraint System) on the driver's side to sup- The sensors react differently depending on plement the protection afforded by the seat- the course of the collision and whether or belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked ger side are used. SRS AIRBAG. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- WARNING sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- ingly so that one or more airbags are belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the

deployed. G021014 airbag in the event of a collision. The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car. subjected.

20 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 21 evastarck

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

Passenger airbag WARNING Airbag label Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated 1. Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of G032244

G021837 the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Label for airbag located on door pillar. The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- Failure to follow the advice given above ger side. This airbag is folded up into a could endanger the life of the child. compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 22.

21 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 22 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Activating/deactivating the airbag*

Key switch off - PACOS WARNING Activating/deactivating General information If the car is equipped with a front passenger The airbag for the front passenger seat can be airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen- deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag is always activated. PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating. WARNING Key switch off/switch Never place a child in a child seat or on a The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is located on the passenger end of the instru- is activated and the symbol in the

ment panel and is accessible when the pas- roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow G032072 senger door is open, (see under the following this advice could endanger the life of the heading, "Switch – PACOS"). Check that the child. Switch location. switch is in the required position. Volvo rec- The airbag is activated. With the switch in ommends that the remote control key's key this position, persons taller than 140 cm WARNING blade be used to change position. can sit in the front passenger seat, but Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- never children in a child seat or on a For information on the key blade, see senger seat if the message in the roof panel booster cushion. page 42. (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is The airbag is deactivated. With the switch deactivated and if the warning symbol for WARNING the airbag system is also displayed in the in this position, children in a child seat or combined instrument panel. This indicates on a booster cushion can sit in the front Failure to follow the advice given above that there has been a severe malfunction. passenger seat, but never persons taller could endanger the life of passengers in the Contact an authorised Volvo workshop than 140 cm. car. immediately.

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 23 evastarck

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

WARNING A text message and a symbol in the roof panel NOTE indicate that the airbag for the front passenger Activated airbag (passenger seat): seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration). When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III, the airbag warning Never place a child in a child seat or on a symbol is shown in the combined instru- booster cushion on the front passenger seat ment panel for approx. 6 seconds, see when the airbag is activated. This applies to page 19. everyone shorter than 140 cm. Following which, the indicator in the roof Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): console is illuminated showing the correct No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in status for the front passenger seat airbag. the front passenger seat when the airbag is For more information on the remote control deactivated. key's different ignition positions, see page 70. Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life. G017800 Messages Indicator in the roof console showing that the passenger airbag is activated. A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

2 that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

2 G017724

Indicator in the roof console showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 24 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)

Side airbag WARNING Location • Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interference in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. • Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. • Use only seat covers approved by G024377 G032949 Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags. Driver's seat, left-hand drive. In a side impact collision a large proportion of • The side airbag is a supplement to the the collision force is transferred by the SIPS seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- Child seats and side airbags er's and front passenger seats protect the The protection provided by the car to children chest area and the hip and are an important seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion part of the SIPS. is not diminished by the side airbag. The SIPS bag system consists of two main A child seat or booster cushion can be placed components, side airbag and sensors. The on the front passenger seat provided that the 1 side airbags are located in the front seat backr- car does not have an activated passenger air- ests. bag. G024378 Front passenger seat, left-hand drive. The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.

24 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 25 evastarck

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision. Label G032254

Label for side airbag located on door pillar.

25 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 26 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

Properties WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas. G032025 WARNING The inflatable curtain (IC) is a supplement to the Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under SIPS and SRS airbags. It is fitted in the head- the top edge of the door windows. Other- lining along both sides of the roof and protects wise, the intended protection of the inflat- the car occupants sitting in the outer seats. A able curtain, which is concealed in the sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors headlining, may be compromised. and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and WARNING passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

26 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 27 evastarck

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

Protection against whiplash injury – The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Correct seating position WHIPS sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- For the best possible protection, the driver and cially designed head restraints in the front front seat passenger should sit in the centre of seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end the seat with as little space as possible collision, where the angle and speed of the col- between the head and the head restraint. lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme WARNING forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, The WHIPS-system is a complement to the the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop. seatbelt. Always use a seatbelt. Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the Properties of the seat seats appear to be undamaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front tem checked even after a minor rear-end seat backrests are lowered backward to alter collision. the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system. G021018

27 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 28 evastarck

01 Safety

01 WHIPS

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system G018567

G021842 Objects in the rear seat. Objects behind driver's/passenger seat. WARNING WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the Do not squeeze rigid objects between the corresponding front seat must be moved rear seat cushion and the front seat back- forward so that it does not touch the folded rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the backrest. function of the WHIPS system.

28 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 29 evastarck

01 Safety

Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS 01

Function Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) has been designed to reduce the risk of the car overturning and to provide the best possible protection in the event of such an accident. The system consists of a stabiliser system, Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the risk of overturning, for example, during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids. The RSC system uses a sensor which registers changes in the car's lateral inclination angle. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC system engages, engine torque is lowered and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability. Read more about the DSTC system on page 150.

WARNING Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the usual precautions for safe driving.

29 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 30 evastarck

01 Safety

01 When the systems deploy

When the systems deploy • Have the car transported to an authorised WARNING Volvo workshop. Do not drive with System Triggered deployed airbags. Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety Seatbelt tensioner, In the event of a • Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace systems may also be damaged. The smoke front seat frontal collision, components in the car's safety system. and dust created when the airbags are and/or side-impact • Always contact a doctor. deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ collision, and/or injury after intensive exposure. In case of rear-end collision irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid NOTE deployment sequence and airbag fabric and/or overturning The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- may cause friction and skin burns. Seatbelt tensioner, In the event of a tems are deployed only once during a colli- rear seat frontal collision and/ sion. or overturning

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA WARNING The airbag control module is located in the Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact centre console. If the centre console is accidentA drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a start the car since the airbags may deploy. side-impact colli- Have the car transported to an authorised sion and/or over- Volvo workshop. turningA

Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli- WHIPS sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

30 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 31 evastarck

01 Safety

Safety mode 01

Reduced functionality reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to WARNING start the car. If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported to an author- car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle ised Volvo workshop. recovery service used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving. Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset, the car can be

G021062 moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than necessary. If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the WARNING information display. This means that the car Never attempt to repair your car or reset the has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a electronics yourself if the car has been in protective state that is enforced when the col- safety mode. This could result in personal lision may have damaged any of the car's vital injury or the car not functioning as normal. functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop one of the safety systems, or the brake system. to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has Attempting to start the car been displayed. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either. WARNING If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the may attempt to start the car. Safety mode message is displayed. Leave Firstly, remove the remote control key and then the car at once. reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to

31 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 32 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Children should sit comfortably and Child seats passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac- safely tivated. The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight Location of child seats and size, for more information, see page 33. You may place: NOTE • a child seat/booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the passenger air- Regulations regarding the placement of bag is not activated 1. children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply. • a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the passenger seat backrest as support. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit G020739 Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas- correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child Child seats and airbags are not compatible. senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the to sit on the knee of a passenger. Volvo has child safety products that are front passenger seat could suffer serious injury Volvo's own child safety equipment is designed for and tested by Volvo. if the airbag deploys. designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine equipment to best ensure that the mounting NOTE WARNING points and attachments are correctly positioned and are sufficiently strong. When using child safety products it is Never place a child in a child seat or on a important to read the installation instruc- booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag tions included. (SRS) is activated. NOTE No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit In the event of questions when fitting child Do not attach the straps for the child seat to in the front passenger seat if the airbag safety products, contact the manufacturer (SRS) is activated. for clearer instructions. the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- Failure to follow the advice given above age the straps. could endanger the life of the child. Allow the back of the child seat to rest against the dashboard. This applies to cars without a

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

32 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 33 evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING Airbag label Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not allow the upper section of the child Label located on instrument panel end face on the seat to rest against the windscreen. passenger side.

Recommended child seats 2 Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 0 Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, max 10 kg straps and support legs. Type approval: E5 03135 (0 – 9 months) Type approval: E5 03135 Group 0+ Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing child Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing max 13 kg seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys- child seat, secured with the ISOFIX child seat, secured with the car's tem. fixture system. seatbelt. Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement. ``

33 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 34 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 1 Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, 9 – 18 kg straps and support legs. Type approval: E5 03135 (9 – 36 months) Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys- straps. tem and straps. Type approval: E5 03171 Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2/3 Volvo Booster cushion – with or without Volvo Booster cushion – with or with- Volvo Booster cushion – with or with- backrest. out backrest. out backrest. 15 – 36 kg Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 (3 – 12 yr) Volvo 2-stage Integrated booster cushion – available as a factory fitted option. Type approval: E5 04189

34 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 35 evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Integrated two-stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Raising the two-stage booster cushion provide optimum comfort and safety. In com- cushions* Stage 1 bination with the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95 to 140 cm in height. Check before driving that: • the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set (see table below) and in locked position • the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's G017875 throat or below the shoulder (see preced- G017696 Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above ing illustrations) the shoulder. • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned Pull the handle forward and up in order to low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- release the booster cushion. tection. Stage 1 Stage 2 Weigh 22 - 36 kg 15 – 25 kg t

Lengt 115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm h

For instructions on adjusting the booster cush- G017719 ion's two levels, see pages 35– 36. Incorrect position, the head must not be posi- G017697 tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.

35 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 36 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Press the booster cushion backwards to Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge the booster cushion from the upper stage to lock. and press it back against the backrest to lock. the lower stage. Stage 2 WARNING Repair or replacement should only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford

the same level of protection. The booster G017692 cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily G017783 worn. Pull the handle forwards to release the Start from the lower stage. Press the but- cushion. ton. NOTE It is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low- ering the two-stage booster cushion.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust G017694 G017784

36 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 37 evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Press down with your hand in the centre of ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Size classes the cushion in order to lock it. Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child WARNING seats are suitable for all seats in all car models. If the instructions regarding the two-stage Consequently, a size classification has been booster cushion are not followed then this introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix- could cause serious injury to a child in the ture system in order to assist users in choosing event of an accident. the correct child seat (see the following table).

IMPORTANT Size Description class

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. G021064 toys) left behind in the space under the A Full size, front-facing child cushion before lowering. Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system seat are concealed behind the lower section of the B Reduced size (alt.1), front- NOTE rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. facing child seat The booster cushion must be lowered first The location of the mounting points is indicated when lowering the backrest. by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- ceding illustration). facing child seat Child safety locks, rear doors Press the seat cushion down to access the C Full size, rear-facing child mounting points. seat The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles D Reduced size, rear-facing can be blocked from opening from the inside. NOTE child seat For more information, see page 55. The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat. E Rear-facing infant seat

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

37 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 38 evastarck

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Size Description WARNING NOTE class Never place a child in the passenger seat if Contact a Volvo dealer for Volvo recom- the car is equipped with an activated airbag. mendations on ISOFIX child seats. F Transverse infant seat, left- hand NOTE G Transverse infant seat, right- hand If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.

Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) F - -

G - -

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) E OK OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 – 12 months) E OK OK

D OK OK

C - OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) D OK OK

C OK OK

38 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 39 evastarck

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) B OK A OKA

B1 OKA OKA

A OKA OKA

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Upper mounting points for child seats Volvo recommends that small children should points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age tions. as possible. WARNING NOTE The child seat's straps must always be For cars with folding head restraints on the routed under the rear head restraints before outside seats the head restraints should be being tensioned at the mounting point. folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.

NOTE G017676 For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed The car is equipped with upper mounting before a child seat can be fitted in the points for certain front-facing child seats. mounting points. These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat. For detailed information on how the child seat The upper mounting points are primarily should be tensioned in the upper mounting intended for use with front-facing child seats.

39 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 40 evastarck

Remote control key/key blade...... 42 Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...... 47 Keyless drive*...... 48 Locking/unlocking...... 50 Child safety locks...... 55 Alarm*...... 56

40 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 41 evastarck

LOCKS AND ALARM 02 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 42 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

General The key blades' unique code is available at Indicator for locking/unlocking The car is supplied with two remote control authorised Volvo workshops, who can order When the car is locked or unlocked using the 02 keys or two PCCs (Personal Car new key blades. remote control key, the direction indicators Communicator). They are used to start the car confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly Loss of a remote control key and for locking and unlocking. performed: If you lose a remote control key then new ones More remote control keys can be ordered – up can be ordered at an authorised Volvo work- • Locking - one flash to six can be programmed and used for the shop. The remaining remote control keys must • Unlocking - two flashes. same car. then be taken to the workshop. The code of the After locking the indication is only given if all The PCC has increased functionality com- missing remote control key must be erased locks are activated once the doors have been pared with the remote control key. Only the from the system as a theft prevention measure. closed. remote control key is referred to in the remain- The current number of keys registered to the The function can be activated/deactivated der of this chapter when describing functions car can be checked under Car settings Car under Car settings Light settings Lock available in both the PCC and remote control Key memory Number of keys. For a key. confirmation light and Car settings Light description of the menu system, see settings Unlock confirmation light. page 116. WARNING For a description of the menu system, see If there are children in the car: Key memory – door mirrors and power page 116. driver's seat* Always remember to switch off the power The settings are automatically linked to the Immobiliser supply to power windows and sunroof by Each remote control key has a unique code. removing the remote control key if the driver remote control key; see page 73 and see leaves the car. page 91. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code. The function can be activated/deactivated Detachable key blade under Car settings Car Key memory The following error messages in the combined A remote control key includes a detachable Seat & mirror positions. For a description of instrument panel's information display are rela- metal key blade for mechanical locking/ the menu system, see page 116. ted to the electronic immobiliser: unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox. For cars with Keyless drive function, see The key blade is also used to deactivate/acti- page 48. vate PACOS*, see page 22. For key blade functions, see page 46.

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 43 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Message Specification • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within Key error Try again Error reading remote 20 metres from the car. 02 control key during For changing the battery, see page 47. start. Try to start the car again. Functions Car key not found Applies only to the PCC's Keyless drive function. Errors reading the PCC during starting. Try G021079 to start the car PCC* (Personal Car Communicator). again. Information Immobiliser Try Remote control key start again function error during Function buttons start. If the fault per- Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate sists; contact an G021078 and then activates the alarm. authorised Volvo Remote control key. workshop. Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail- Locking gate while the alarm is deactivated. For starting the car, see page 95. Unlocking The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv- Low battery in remote control key Approach light duration er's door after one press of the button and, The batteries should be replaced if: after a further press of the button - within 10 Tailgate • the information symbol illuminates and seconds - opening the remaining doors. Replace car key battery is shown in the Panic function The function is changed under Car settings display Lock settings Doors unlock. For a and/or description of the menu system, see page 116.

43 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 44 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Approach lighting – Used to switch on the Range Using the information button enables access to car's lighting at a distance. For more informa- The remote control key has a range of up to certain information from the car via the indica- 02 tion, see page 82. 20 m from the car. tor lamps. Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm Using the information button NOTE for the tailgate only1. For more information, see ± Press the information button . page 51. The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, All indicator lamps flash for approximately Panic function – Used to attract attention buildings, topographical conditions etc. The 7 seconds and the light travels around on in an emergency. car can always be locked/unlocked using the PCC. This indicates that the informa- the key blade, see page 46. tion from the car has been read. Press and hold the red button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to If any of the other buttons are pressed dur- activate the direction indicators and the horn. Unique functions PCC* ing this time then the reading is interrupted. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least NOTE 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off If none of the indicator lamps illuminates automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after Global opening* 7 seconds and after the light has travelled One long press - at least 4 seconds - on button around on the PCC), contact an authorised Volvo workshop. or opens or closes all windows. Also closes the sunroof if open. Indicator lamps display information in accord- The function can be used to quickly air the car ance with the following illustration: in hot weather for example. G021080

WARNING Information button If the sunroof and windows are closed using Indicator lamps the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

1 On cars with power tailgate* the tailgate is opened if the button is kept depressed for more than 2 seconds.

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 45 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from whether anybody is in the car. This indication the car. is only displayed if the alarm was triggered. 02 The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat that NOTE is transmitted to the car's bodywork. For this The information button functions can be reason the function of the HBS can be distur- disrupted by surrounding radio waves, bed in an environment subject to noise and buildings, topographical conditions etc. vibration.

Out of PCC range Detachable key blade If the PCC is too far away from the car for the Using the remote control key's detachable key G030262 information to be read then the status the car blade: was last left in is shown, without the light trav- Green continuous light – the car is locked. elling around on the PCC. • the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with Yellow continuous light – the car is If several PCCs are used for the car then it is the remote control key unlocked. only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking • access to the glovebox is blocked. Red light flashing alternately in the two that shows correct status. indicator lamps – indicates, using the HBS (Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be NOTE in the car. This indication is only displayed If no indicator lamps illuminate when the if the alarm was triggered. information button is used then this can be Red continuous light – the alarm has been because the last communication between triggered. the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topo- Range graphical conditions etc. The PCC lock functions have a range of up to 20 m from the car. Heart Beat Sensor The approach lighting, panic function and the The function operates using an HBS (Heart functions controlled by the information button Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's alarm system and can indicate at a distance

45 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 46 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Removing the key blade Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the 02 remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:

NOTE When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.

G021082 1. Unlock the driver's door using the key blade in the door handle's keyhole. Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the At the same time pull the key blade straight remote control key in the ignition switch. out backwards. Inserting the key blade Carefully refit the key blade in place in the remote control key, to avoid damaging it. 1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot. 2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

46 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 47 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

Replacing the battery Opening PCC* (2 batteries) Slide the spring-loaded catch to the 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 02 side. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side up. At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the the (+) side down. hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up. Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V NOTE - one in the remote control key and two in the PCC. Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- Assembly teries falling out when it is opened. 1. Press the remote control key together. 2. Hold the remote control key with the slot IMPORTANT pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot. Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their 3. Lightly press the key blade. You should functionality. hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in. Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are IMPORTANT secured on the inside of the cover, with Make sure that you dispose of old batteries regard to their (+) and (–) sides. in an environmentally-friendly way. Remove control key (1 battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 48 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless drive (only PCC) possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is Interference to PCC function on the opposite side of the car. Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- 02 Keyless lock and ignition system The red rings in the preceding illustration indi- fere with the keyless drive system. For this cate the range covered by the system's anten- reason, do not place the PCC near mobile nas. phones or metallic objects. If all PCCs are removed from the car when the If interference is experienced nonetheless, use engine is running or key position II is active the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see (see page 70) and if all doors are closed, then page 43. a warning message is shown in the information Unlocking display and an audio reminder signal sounds at Open the doors with the door handles or open the same time. the tailgate with the tailgate's handle. The warning message clears and the audio Unlocking with the key blade G017871 reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not back to the car after: operating, then the driver's door can be The keyless drive function in the PCC allows • a door has been opened and closed unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen- the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with- the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch tral locking is not activated. out the need for a key. You simply have to have • the PCC with you. The system makes it easier • the READ button has been pressed. NOTE and more convenient to open the car, for Handling the PCC safely example when your hands are full. If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the Unlocking with the key blade triggers the alarm. For deactivation, see page 56. The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keyless car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car function. Additional PCCs can be ordered. is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry. However, if someone breaks into the car, Key memory – driver's seat and door PCC range mirrors In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from reactivated. It is therefore important to handle PCC memory function the car door handle or tailgate. This means that all PCCs with great care. If several people each with a PCC approach the the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are must have the PCC with him or her. It is not IMPORTANT implemented for the person who opens the driver's door. Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 49 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

After the driver's door has been opened by Lock settings Door handle, right rear person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC- The keyless function can be adapted to specify Centre console, under the rear section B shall drive, the settings can be changed in which of the car doors are to be unlocked, 02 three ways: under Car settings Lock settings Centre console, under the front section. • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting Keyless entry. For a description of the menu behind the steering wheel, person B system, see page 116. WARNING presses their PCC's unlock button, see page 43 People with pacemaker operations should Antenna location not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless • Select one of three possible memories for system's antennae with their pacemaker. seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see This is to prevent interference between the page 73. pacemaker and the keyless system. • Adjust the seat and mirrors manually; see page 72 and see page 90. Locking Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside. All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car G021179 will not be locked. The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car: NOTE Tailgate, by wiper motor On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position Door handle, left rear – otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed. Roof, above centre rear seat Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 50 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

From the outside From the inside Locking The remote control key can lock/unlock all Press the central locking button after the front 02 doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different doors have been closed. Press and hold to also sequences can be selected for locking/unlock- close all of the side windows and the sun- ing; see page 116. roof*. The lock buttons and door handles are disen- All the doors can be locked manually with their gaged during locking which also prevents respective lock buttons after the door has been opening from the inside, so-called deadlocks closed. function*, see page 53. Automatic locking If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the The doors and tailgate can be locked automat- remote control key, the battery may be dis- ically when the car starts to move. charged - lock or unlock the door with the G019216 detachable key blade; see page 46. The function can be activated/deactivated All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked under Car settings Lock settings The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car or unlocked simultaneously using the central Doors automatic lock. For a description of the is unlocked, see page 206. It cannot be locking button on either front door. Press one menu system, see page 116. opened if the car is locked and the alarm is side of the button to lock - the other side to armed. unlock. Glovebox WARNING Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out- different ways: side. • Press the central locking button (front doors only). Automatic relocking Press and hold to also open all side win- If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened dows*. within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked • Pull the door handle once and release. Pull again automatically. This function prevents the the door handle again to open the door. car from being left unlocked unintentionally. For cars with alarms, see page 56. G031378

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 51 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked Unlocking with the remote control key Unlocking the car from inside using the remote control key's detachable key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*, blade. (For information on the key blade, see and the tailgate unlocked and opened on its 02 page 42). own* by using the remote control key. Locking the glovebox: NOTE Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock. On cars with the power operated tailgate Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. option, the tailgate is opened – otherwise it The keyhole is horizontal in the locked is only unlocked, see page 52. position. Pull out the key blade. If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm indicator on the instrument panel stops to G021099 Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order. show that alarm for the whole of the car is not armed. The alarm's level and movement sen- To unlock and open* the tailgate. Tailgate sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate ± Press the lighting panel button (1). are automatically disconnected. The doors remain locked and armed. Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button for lock- NOTE ing, see page 43. If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm When the tailgate is closed it remains unlocked until the car is relocked with the indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash remote control key. to show that alarm is armed. G021093

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 52 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Power operated tailgate* NOTE WARNING 02 • If the system has been operating con- Pay attention to the risk of crushing when tinuously for more than 60 seconds then opening/closing. Before starting to open/ it is switched off to avoid overloading. It close; make sure that there is nobody close can be used again after about 10 to the tailgate as a crushing injury could minutes. have serious consequences. • If the battery has been discharged or Always operate the tailgate with caution. disconnected then the cover must be opened and closed manually once in Manual tailgate operation order to reset the system. The system is disengaged if the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle is G031965 Snow and wind actuated a second time. The tailgate can then If the tailgate is forced down by something just be operated manually. when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or IMPORTANT Opening the tailgate strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to Pay attention to the height of the roof when lower, then it is closed automatically. The tailgate can be opened three using power operation. Do not use power ways (two of which involve this but- tailgate operation with low roof heights, see Pinch protection ton): under the heading "Interrupt opening/clos- If something with sufficient resistance prevents ing the tailgate". • Long press on the tailgate button in the the tailgate from opening/closing then the lighting panel - hold the button depressed pinch protection is activated. until the tailgate starts to open. • During opening - power tailgate operation • Long press on the tailgate button on the is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- remote control key - hold the button gaged. depressed until the tailgate starts to open. • During closing - the tailgate returns to the • Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate fully open position. beneath the outside handle and raise the tailgate.

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 53 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Closing the tailgate Deadlocks* If someone is going to stay in the car but the Close using this button on the tailgate When deadlocked, the doors cannot be doors must be locked from the outside, then 02 or manually. opened from the inside if they are locked. the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This is carried out as follows: • Press the tailgate's button – the tailgate The deadlocks are activated with the remote closes automatically. control key and are set after a 10 second delay 1. Access the menu system under Car after the doors are locked. settings (for a detailed description of the Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate menu system, see page 116). This can be done four ways (of which The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock three involve this button): state with the remote control key. The driver's 2. Select Reduced guard. door can also be unlocked with the detachable Press the tailgate button in the lighting 3. Select Activate once: The instrument • key blade. panel panel display shows the message Reduced guard - See manual and the • Press the tailgate button on the remote Temporary deactivation control deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked. • Press the tailgate button on the tailgate or • Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle. Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine Tailgate movement is stopped following the is switched off the audio system's display same pattern as when pinch protection is trig- shows the message ENTER reduces gered. Refer to the section with the heading protection until the engine is started "Pinch protection". again. Press EXIT to cancel - then select one of the alternatives: • If the deadlocks function shall be switched G031384 off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Active menu options are indicated with a cross. If the car is equipped with an alarm with move- Navigation ment and tilt detectors*, then these are switched off at the same time, see page 56. ENTER The next time the engine is started, the system MENU is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the message Full guard at which EXIT ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 54 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are re-engaged. 02 Or: • If the locking system shall not be changed: Make no selection and lock the car or press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE If the car is equipped with an alarm: Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked. If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

54 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 55 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

Manual blocking of the rear doors Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows* 02 G021077 G019300 The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible When the electric child safety lock is active: when the doors are open. • the rear windows can only be opened with ± Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus the driver's door control panel activate or deactivate the child safety lock. • the rear doors cannot be opened from the The door cannot be opened from inside. inside. 1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti- The doors can be opened from inside. vated in ignition position I or II see page 70. NOTE 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Cars with electric child safety locks do not panel. have manual child locks. > The information display shows a message. The lamp on the switch illuminates when the locks are activated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 56 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

General NOTE • LED not lit – Alarm not armed The alarm is triggered if: The LED flashes once every other second 02 One of the detectors for the alarm is located • – Alarm is armed • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened under the cup holder in the centre console. This detector is sensitive for metals. The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the a non-approved key is used or if an attempt • • alarm (and until the remote control key is is made to force the ignition switch Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the centre console's cup holder inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- a movement is detected in the passenger • as such objects could accidentally trigger tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig- compartment (if fitted with a movement the alarm. gered. detector*) • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted Arming the alarm with a tilt detector*) NOTE • Press the remote control key lock button. • a battery cable is disconnected Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm Disarming the alarm system components. All such attempts anyone tries to disconnect the siren. Press the remote control key unlock but- • could affect the terms of insurance. • If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- ton. mation display shows a message. Contact an Alarm indicator Deactivating a triggered alarm authorised Volvo workshop. Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the ignition NOTE switch. The movement detectors trigger the alarm in the event of movements in the passenger Other alarm functions compartment. For this reason the alarm could be triggered if the car is left with a Automatic re-arming of the alarm window open or if an electric passenger This function prevents the car being left with compartment heater is used. To avoid this: Close the windows when leaving the car and alarm disarmed unintentionally. aim the air from the passenger compart- If the car is unlocked with the remote control ment heater so that it is not directed up into G031385 key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the the passenger compartment. doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 A red LED on the instrument panel indicates minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- the alarm system's status: armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 57 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Alarm signals Reduced alarm level 3. Select Activate once: The instrument When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- panel display shows the message pens: Reduced guard See manual and the 02 movement and tilt detectors are switched A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds. • off when the car is locked. The siren has its own battery which is independent of the car battery. or • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine or until the alarm has been deactivated. is switched off the audio system's display Remote control key not working shows the message Press ENTER to If the remote control key is not working, the reduce guard until engine is started. alarm can still be switched off and the car Press EXIT to cancel - then select one of G031384 started as follows: the alternatives: Active menu options are indicated with a cross. 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. • If the movement and tilt detectors shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the The alarm is triggered and the siren Navigation car. sounds. ENTER If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func- 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition MENU tion* then it is switched off at the same time, switch. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm see page 53. indicator flashes quickly until the remote EXIT control key is inserted. The next time the engine is started, the system To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm - is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis- for example when leaving a dog in the car or play shows the message Full guard at which during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt the movement and tilt detectors and the dead- detectors can be temporarily switched off. This locks function are re-engaged. is carried out as follows: Or: 1. Access the menu system under Car If the detectors shall not be switched off: settings (for a detailed description of the • Make no selection and lock the car or press menu system, see page 116). EXIT and lock the car. 2. Select Reduced guard.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 58 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Testing the alarm system 2. Arm the alarm, see page 56. Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on 02 Testing the movement detector in the the remote control key. passenger compartment 3. Wait 15 seconds. 1. Close all windows. Remain in the car. 4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the 2. Arming the alarm, see page 56. dashboard. A siren sounds and all direc- 3. Wait 15 seconds. tion indicators flash. 4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for- 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car ward and back at backrest height. A siren with the remote control key. sounds and all direction indicators flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key. Testing the alarm sensors in the doors 1. Arming the alarm, see page 56. 2. Wait 15 seconds. 3. Unlock the driver's door using the key blade. 4. Open the driver's door. A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key. Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see page 56.

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 59 evastarck

02 Locks and alarm

59 60 evastarck XC60 (Y413);9;3 * Option/accessory, formoreinformation, seeIntroduction. All-wheel drive– 98 Gearboxes...... Starting theengine– 95 Starting theengine...... Power panoramaroof* Windows, rearviewanddoor 86 Wipers andwashing...... 77 Lighting...... Steering wheel 72 Seats...... 70 Key positions...... Instruments andcontrols HomeLink 107 Parking brake...... Hill DescentControl- 103 Foot brake...... E*...... 110 EU*...... 76 ...... AWD*...... external battery D*...... 105 HDC*...... 93 ...... 62 ...... mirrors...... 97 ...... 102 89 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page60

G020912 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 61 evastarck

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 62 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Left-hand drive.

62 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 63 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Menus and messages, 77, Climate control, ECC* 123 direction indicators, 80, 118, main/dipped beam, trip 147 Gear selector 98 computer Controls for active chas- 151 03 Cruise control 152, 153 sis (Four-C)*

Horn, airbags 20, 76 Wipers and washing 86, 87

Combined instrument 65, 69 Steering wheel adjust- 76 panel ment

Menu, audio and phone 116, Bonnet opener 226 control 133, 192 Parking brake* 107 Start/stop button 95 Seat adjustment* 72 Ignition switch 70 Headlamp control, 51, 77, Information display for 116 opener for fuel filler flap 206 menu navigation and tailgate Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55, 89, 90

Hazard warning flashers 80

Menu control, climate 116, control and audio system 123, 135

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 64 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Right-hand drive.

64 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 65 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Information displays Information display for 116 Bonnet opener 226 menu navigation Steering wheel adjust- 76 Ignition switch 70 ment 03 Start/stop button 95 Menus and messages, 77, direction indicators, 80, 118, Cruise control 152, 153 main/dipped beam, trip 147 computer Combined instrument 65, 69 Controls for active chas- 151

panel G021112 sis (Four-C)* Horn, airbags 20, 76 Information displays. Gear selector 98 Menu, audio and phone 116, The information displays show information on control 123, 135 Climate control, ECC* 123 some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer and messages. The information Wipers and washing 86, 87 Menu control, climate 116, is shown with text and symbols. control and audio system 123, 135 There are further descriptions under the func- Headlamp control, 51, 77, tions that use the information displays. opener for fuel filler flap 206 Hazard warning flashers 80 and tailgate

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55, 89, 90

Seat adjustment* 72

Parking brake 107

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 66 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Meters Indicator, information and warning symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbols symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure. Indicator and information symbols Symbol Specification 03 Direction indicators on trailer

Emissions system

G021113 ABS fault G018282 Meters in the combined instrument panel. Rear fog lamp on Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols. Indicator and information symbols Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page Stability system 147, and Refuelling, page 206. Indicator and warning symbols 1 Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Main beam and direction indicator symbol Engine preheater (diesel) speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Functionality check Low level in fuel tank All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. Information, read display text When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is Main beam On disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 227.

66 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 67 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification Rear fog lamp NOTE This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp Left-hand direction indicators is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the on the driver's side. READ button, or clear automatically after a Right-hand direction indicators Stability system while. A flashing symbol indicates that the stability 03 system is operating. If the symbol illuminates Main beam On Direction indicators on trailer with constant glow then there is a fault in the The symbol illuminates when main beam is on This symbol flashes when the direction indica- system. and with main beam flash tors are used and the trailer is connected. If the Engine preheater (diesel)* symbol flashes more quickly then one of the Left/right-hand direction indicators This symbol illuminates during engine preheat- lamps on the car or the trailer is broken. Both direction indicator symbols flash when ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature the hazard warning flashers are used. Emissions system is below 2 °C. The car can be started once the If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to symbol goes out. Indicator and warning symbols a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to Low level in fuel tank an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- Symbol Specification When the symbol illuminates the level in the tem checked. A fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible. Low oil pressure ABS fault Information, read display text If this symbol illuminates then the system is not When one of the car's systems does not Parking brake applied working. The car's regular brake system con- behave as intended, this information symbol tinues to work, but without the ABS function. illuminates and a text appears on the informa- Airbags – SRS 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the tion display. The message text is cleared with engine. the READ button, see page 119, or it disap- Seatbelt reminder 2. Restart the engine. pears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The infor- 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to mation symbol can also illuminate in Alternator not charging an authorised Volvo workshop to have the conjunction with other symbols. ABS system checked.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 68 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification Airbags – SRS page 229. If the brake fluid level is nor- If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates mal but the symbols are still illuminated, Fault in brake system while driving, it means a fault has been the car can be driven, with great care, to detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. Warning IC systems. Drive immediately to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked. 03 WARNING A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is Seatbelt reminder not used. Warnings are made via display text. For informa- If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the tion on checking the oil level, see page 227 This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Low oil pressure in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. If this symbol illuminates during driving then Alternator not charging The reason for the loss of brake fluid must the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the be investigated by an authorised Volvo This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault workshop. engine immediately and check the engine oil has occurred in the electrical system. Contact level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- an authorised Volvo workshop. nates and the oil level is normal, contact an Fault in brake system WARNING authorised Volvo workshop. If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- Parking brake applied may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place nated at the same time, there is a risk that This symbol illuminates with a constant glow and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, the rear end will skid during heavy braking. when the parking brake is applied. With the see page 229. electric parking brake, this symbol flashes If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the Warning while it is being applied and then illuminates The red warning symbol illuminates when a with a constant glow. same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system. fault has been indicated which could affect the A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- Read the message on the information display. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the atory text is shown on the information display engine. at the same time. The symbol remains visible NOTE 2. Restart the engine. until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ but- If both symbols extinguish, continue This symbol also illuminates when the • ton, see page 119. The warning symbol can mechanical parking brake is only lightly driving. applied. also illuminate in conjunction with other sym- • If the symbols remain illuminated, check bols. the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

68 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 69 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Action: Trip meter Clock 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further. 2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear 03 the message using the READ button. Reminder – doors not closed If one of the doors, the bonnet 2 or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an G021123 G021125 explanatory text message in the combined instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place Trip meter and controls. Clock and setting knob. as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet Display for trip meter Controls for setting the clock. or boot lid, whichever is open. Controls for switching between trip meters Information display for showing the time. If the car is driven at a speed lower than T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip approx. 7 km/h then the information Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set meters. symbol illuminates. the time. The set time is shown in the informa- The meters are used to measure short dis- tion display. If the car is driven at a speed higher tances. than about 7 km/h then the warning The clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol illuminates. One short press on the control switches symbol in conjunction with a message, see between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long page 119. press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the display.

2 Only cars with alarm*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 70 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

Functions IMPORTANT Starting the engine Start the engine, see page 95. Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock. Stop engine Do not insert the remote control key back- Press START/STOP ENGINE. wards! Grip the end with the detachable key blade. see page 45. If the car is moving or has automatic transmis- 03 sion and the gear selector is not in position P: Press twice or hold the button depressed until NOTE the engine stops. For cars with keyless function*, see Return to key position 0 page 48. Press START/STOP ENGINE to return from I G031372 or II to key position 0. Ignition switch with remote control key, start/stop Key position 0 button. Insert the remote control key in the ignition WARNING switch. Insert and remove the remote control key When towing, the remote control key must The remote control key is inserted into the igni- Key position I be in the ignition switch so that the lighting tion switch. With one gentle push the remote Press the remote control key into the ignition can be switched on. control key is captured into the correct posi- switch and press START/STOP ENGINE. tion. The remote control key is withdrawn from the NOTE ignition switch by means of one touch. The key To reach key position II without starting the is then ejected and can be removed. Automatic engine - do not depress the brake/clutch transmission* must be in position P. pedal. For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed, see Key position II page 133. Press the remote control key into the ignition switch and press START/STOP ENGINE for approx. 2 seconds.

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 71 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

Posi- Function tion 0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. The steering lock is deactivated. The audio system can be used. 03 I The panorama roof, power windows, phone, ventilation fan, ECC and windscreen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on. Warn- ing/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. All equipment operates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster which only work when the engine is running.

71 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 72 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat Check that the front seat backrest is prop- before setting off, never while driving. erly engaged after it is raised. Check that the seat is locked in position. Power seat* 03 Lowering the front seat backrest* G021127

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the wheel 1. Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- G021133 G021129 als. Check that the seat is locked after Front edge of seat cushion up/down changing position. The passenger seat backrest can be folded Seat forward/backward and up/down Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, forward to make room for long loads. pump up/down. Move the seat as far back/down as possi- Backrest rake Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. ble. The power front seats have overload protection Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. Adjust the backrest to an upright position. which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or Control panel for power seat*. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the and fold it forward. seat again. Raising takes place in reverse order. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

1 Also applies to power seat.

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 73 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Preparations 2. Hold the button depressed to store set- matically adopt the positions stored in the key The seats can be adjusted for a certain time tings while depressing one of the memory memory. after unlocking the door with the remote con- buttons. trol key without the key in the ignition switch. NOTE Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- Using a stored setting The seat and the door mirrors do not move tion I and can always be made when the engine Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you if they are already set the relevant position. is running. 03 release the button then the movement of the Seat with memory function* seat will stop. It is also possible to use the key memory by pressing the unlock button on the remote con- 2 Key memory* in remote control key trol key when the driver's door is open. The positions of the driver's seat and the door mirrors are stored in the key memory when the The key memory can be activated/deactivated car is locked with the remote control key. under Car Key memory Seat & mirror positions. For a description of the menu system, see page 116.

NOTE The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat's three memories are G021134 completely independent of each other. Store setting Memory button Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press Memory button one of the buttons to stop the seat. G014387 Memory button Restarting to reach the seat position stored in When the car is unlocked with the same remote the key memory is performed by pressing the Button for storing settings control key and the driver's door is opened the unlock button on the remote control key. The 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors. driver's seat and also the door mirrors auto- driver's door must then be open.

2 For key memory for keyless drive, see page 48. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 74 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING pressed in while the head restraint is pressed NOTE down. Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do The front seats may need to be pushed for- not play with the controls. Check that there Manual lowering of the outer head wards, and/or the backrests adjusted are no objects in front of, behind or under restraints, rear seat upwards, in order that the rear backrests the seat during adjustment. Ensure that can be folded forward fully. none of the backseat passengers will be 03 trapped. • The left-hand backrest can be folded separately. Rear seats • The centre backrest can be folded separately. Head restraint, centre seat, rear • The right-hand backrest can be folded together with the centre backrest. • All backrests can be folded together. G031380

Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward. The head restraint is moved back manually until a "click" can be heard.

G000000 Lowering the rear seat backrest The triple-section rear seat backrest can be Adjust the head restraint according to passen- folded in different ways in order to facilitate ger height so that the whole of the back of the loading long objects. head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required. To lower the head restraint again, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be

74 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 75 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising.

03 G031382

If the centre backrest is being lowered - fold and adjust the centre backrest's head restraint downwards, see page 74. The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place. Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

75 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 76 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.

With speed related power steering* the level of 03 steering force can be adjusted, see page 151.

Keypads* G021138 G031398

Adjusting the steering wheel. Horn. Lever - releasing the steering wheel Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal. Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth: 1. Pull the lever towards you to release the

steering wheel. G031397 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Keypads in the steering wheel. that suits you. Cruise control, see page 152 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering Adaptive cruise control, see page 153 wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as Audio and phone control, see page 133 you push the lever back.

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 77 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Light switches The display lighting is automatically subdued Main/dipped beam in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel. The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling 03 The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden. G031407 G031405 1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote Overview, light switches. control key in position I. Headlamp control and stalk switch. Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Position for main beam flash 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ instrument lighting lower beam alignment. Position for main beam Rear fog lamp Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto- Front fog lamps* matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not Posi- Specification equipped with the thumbwheel. Light switches tion

Thumbwheel 1 for headlamp levelling Automatic*/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.

Instrument lighting Position/parking lamps Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position, see page 70. Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.

1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 78 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE When main beam has been activated the sym- tion. The function is only active in twilight or bol illuminates in the combined instru- darkness and only when the car is moving. Main beam can only be activated in position ment panel. . The function can be deactivated/activated with the button. Active Xenon lights* For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Main beam flash page 83. 03 Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is Position/parking lamps released. Dipped beam When the engine is started, dipped beam is activated automatically* if the headlamp control is in position 2. If necessary, auto-

matic dipped beam for this position can be G021143 deactivated by an authorised Volvo workshop. Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) In position dipped beam is always acti- and activated (right) respectively. vated automatically when the engine is running If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- or when the remote control key is in position lamps (ABL) then the light from the headlamps G031408 II. follows steering wheel movement to provide Headlamp control in position for position/parking maximum illumination in bends and crossings, lamps. Main beam so providing increased safety. Main beam can only be activated when the Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi- The function is activated automatically when tion (number plate lighting comes on at the headlamp control is in position . Acti- same time). vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk the car is started. The button in the cen- switch towards the steering wheel to the end tre console illuminates when the function is Rear position lamps also come on when the position and release. activated, it flashes in the event of a malfunc- tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody behind.

2 For certain markets dipped beam is deactivated in this position.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 79 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Brake light Front fog lamps* Rear fog lamp The brake light automatically comes on during braking. Emergency brake light and automatic hazard warning flashers, EBL Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated in 03 the event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakes are activated. This function means that the brake light flashes intensely to immediately alert cars travelling behind.

The system is activated if ABS is used for more G031409 G031410 than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy braking, however, only when braking from speeds Button for front fog lamps. Button for rear fog lamp. above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is The front fog lamps can be switched on along The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor- with main/dipped beam or position/parking can only be switched on in combination with mally again and the hazard warning flashers lamps. main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps. are switched on automatically. The hazard warning flashers remain on until the car accel- Press the button for on/off. The light in the but- Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp erates again but can be deactivated with the ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on. indicator symbol on the combined button for hazard warning flashers. instrument panel and the light in the button illu- NOTE minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on. Regulations for using front fog lamps vary The rear fog lamps are switched off automati- between different countries. cally when the engine is switched off.

NOTE Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 80 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Hazard warning flashers Direction indicators/flashers Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see page 67.

Interior lighting

03 G031414 G031415

Button for hazard warning flashers. Direction indicators/flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning

Short flash sequence G021149 flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in Move the stalk switch up or down to the the combined instrument panel flash when the first position and release. The direction Controls in roof console for the front reading hazard warning flashers are in use. indicators flash three times. The function lamps and passenger compartment lighting. The hazard warning flashers are activated can be activated/deactivated under Car Reading lamp, left-hand side automatically when the car brakes so suddenly settings Light settings Turn Reading lamp, right-hand side that the emergency brake lights (EBL) are acti- indicators, 3-flash. For a description of vated and if the speed is below 30 km/h. They the menu system, see page 116. Interior lighting remain on when the car has stopped and are All lighting in the passenger compartment can deactivated automatically when the car is Continuous flash sequence be switched on and off manually within driven off again or if the button is depressed. Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position. 30 minutes from when: The stalk switch remains in its position and is • the engine has been switched off and the moved back manually, or automatically by the remote control key is in position 0 steering wheel movement. • the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

80 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 81 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Front roof lighting Lighting, cargo area The front reading lamps are switched on or off The lighting in the cargo area is switched on by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- and off respectively when the tailgate is sole. opened or closed. Rear roof lighting Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light- 03 ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment: • Off – right-hand side depressed, automatic

G021150 lighting deactivated. • Neutral position – automatic lighting acti- Rear roof lighting in cars without panorama roof. vated. The lamps are switched on or off by pressing • On – left-hand side depressed, passenger each respective button. compartment lighting on.

G031416 Courtesy lighting Neutral position Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- When the button is in neutral position the pas- Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof. ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- senger compartment lighting is switched on tively when a side door is opened or closed. and off automatically in accordance with the following. Glovebox lighting The passenger compartment lighting is Glovebox lighting is switched on and off switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if: respectively when the lid is opened or closed. • the car is unlocked with the remote control Vanity mirror key or key blade, see pages 43 or 45 The lighting for the vanity mirror, see • the engine is switched off and the remote page 191, is switched on and off respectively control key is in position 0. when the cover is opened or closed. Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

81 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 82 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

• the engine is started duration. For a description of the menu sys- Adjusting headlamp pattern • the car is locked. tem, see page 116. The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the Approach light duration* doors is open. Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see page 43, and is used 03 If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. matically after two minutes. When the function is activated with the remote control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, Home safe light duration number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept G021151 switched on to work as home safe lighting after The length of time for which the approach light- the car has been locked. ing should be kept on can be set under Car Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic. settings Light settings Approach light 1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch. duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 116. 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash, see page 77. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. When the function is activated, dipped beam,

parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number G021152 plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic. lighting are switched on. The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to The length of time for which the home safe avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be lighting should be kept on can be set under Car set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat- settings Light settings Home safe light tern will also better illuminate the verge.

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 83 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Active Xenon headlamps* page 84, and the dimensions in the fol- Hold the button in the centre console lowing list: depressed for at least 5 seconds. The car must • Templates A and D: horizontal line be stationary when the headlamp pattern is approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx. adjusted. The message HEADLIGHTS SET 20 mm FOR RH TRAFFIC or HEADLIGHTS SET • Templates B and C: horizontal line FOR LH TRAFFIC is shown in the display. approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx. 03 14 mm Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good. Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1, see page 85: • A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens) • B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens) • C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens) • D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens) 2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out. 3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the right distance from the edge of the headlamp lens using the illustration, see

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 84 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Aligning the templates

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

84 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 85 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Templates for halogen headlamps

85 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 86 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

Windscreen wipers 1 Continuous wiping in the right-hand display in the combined The wipers sweep at normal speed. instrument panel. Activating and setting the sensitivity The wipers sweep at high speed. When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch 03 IMPORTANT must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. Before activating the wipers during winter - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button in and that any snow or ice on the wind- . The windscreen wipers make one screen (and rear window) is scraped away. sweep. G031420 Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT an extra sweep. Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi- are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An wipers are operating. extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is Windscreen wipers off turned upward.) Move the stalk switch to position 0 to Rain sensor* Deactivating switch off the windscreen wipers. The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- Single sweep screen wipers based on how much water it ton or move the stalk switch down to Raise the stalk switch and release to detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of another wiper program. the rain sensor can be adjusted using the make one sweep. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated thumbwheel. when the key is removed from the ignition Intermittent wiping When the rain sensor is activated a light in the switch or five minutes after the ignition has Set the number of sweeps per time been switched off. unit with the thumbwheel when inter- button the rain sensor symbol is shown mittent wiping is selected.

1 Replacing the wiper blades and filling washer fluid, see page 238.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 87 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers will make several more Wiper and washer, rear window sweeps once the stalk switch has been The windscreen wipers could start and be released. The headlamps are washed alter- damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- nately to prevent light intensity being reduced. tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument NOTE panel and the lamp in the button go out. One headlamp is washed at a time. 03

Washing the headlamps and windows Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid G031422 freezing solid. G031420 High-pressure headlamp washing* Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a Rear window wiper – continuous speed large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow fifth windscreen wash cycle. in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping. Wiper – reversing G031420 G031421 Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen Washing function. wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping 2. The function stops when reverse gear Washing the windscreen is disengaged. Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp If the rear window wiper is already on at con- washers. tinuous speed, no change is made.

2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 88 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

NOTE On cars with rain sensor, the rear window wiper is activated with reversing, if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

88 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 89 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

General Power windows WARNING Laminated glass Make sure that children or other passengers The windscreen and panorama roof are not in danger of becoming trapped in have laminated glass. It is reinforced any way when closing the windows, in particular when the remote control key is used. which provides better protection against break-ins and improved 03 sound insulation in the passenger compart- WARNING ment. Other glass surfaces*. If there are children in the car, remember to Water and dirt-repellent coating* always switch off the power supply to the Windows are treated with a coating power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

that improves the view in difficult G031423 weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 264. Driver's door control panel. Operating Switch for electric child safety locks* and IMPORTANT disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 55. Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the defroster to Rear window controls remove ice from the mirrors. An ice scraper could scratch the mirror glass! Front window controls

WARNING Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows from the driver's G031424 door. Operating the power windows. Operating without auto Operating with auto

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 90 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

All power windows can be operated using the Operating with auto Door mirrors control panel in the driver's door. Each control Move one of the controls up/down to the end panel in the other doors can only control its position and release it. The window runs auto- own respective power window. The power win- matically to its end position. dows can only be controlled with one control Remote control and central locking panel at a time. buttons 03 In order that the power windows can be used All side windows can be opened/closed auto- the remote control key must be in position I or matically with the remote control key or the II. After the car has been running the power central locking buttons: windows can be operated for several minutes ± Press and hold the lock button until the even when the remote control key has been windows start to open/close. To interrupt removed, but not however after the door has opening/closing, press the lock button G031425 been opened. again. Door mirror controls. Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its Resetting Adjusting movement. It is possible to override the pinch If the battery is disconnected then the function 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door protection when closing has been interrupted, for automatic opening must be reset so that it mirror or the R button for the right-hand e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the but- can work correctly. door mirror. The light in the button illumi- ton up until the window is closed. The pinch 1. Gently raise the front section of the button nates. protection is reactivated after a brief pause. to raise the window to its end position and 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the hold it there for one second. centre. NOTE 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise should no longer be illuminated. when the rear windows are open is to also 3. Raise the front section of the button again open the front windows slightly. for one second. WARNING Operating without auto WARNING The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- Move one of the controls up/down gently. The Resetting must be carried out to ensure that mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- power windows move up/down as long as the pinch protection works. ther away than they actually are. control is held in position.

90 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 91 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Retractable power door mirrors* Angling the door mirror when parking The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving The door mirror can be angled down for the in narrow spaces: driver to view the side of the road when parking Home safe and approach lighting for example. The light on the door mirrors illuminates when 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the approach lighting or home safe lighting is same time. ± Engage reverse gear and press the L or R selected, see page 82. button. 2. Release them after approximately one sec- 03 ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror Rear window and door mirror fully retracted position. automatically returns to its original position defrosters after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L the button labelled L or R respectively and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- Automatic retraction when locking tion. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- Storing the position* matically retracted/extended. The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the The function can be activated/deactivated remote control key. When the car is unlocked under Car settings Fold mirr. when with the same remote control key the mirrors locking. For a description of the menu system, and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions see page 116. when the driver's door is opened. Resetting to neutral G031426 Mirrors that have been moved out of position The function can be activated/deactivated Use the defroster to quickly remove misting under Car Key memory Seat & mirror by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ and ice from the rear window and the door mir- positions. For a description of the menu sys- extending to work correctly: rors. tem, see page 116. 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- Press the button once to start simultaneous tons. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The light in the button indicates that the function is 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically tons. and its duration is controlled by the outside 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. temperature.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 92 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto- dimming with the dimming control when lights matically if the car is started in an outside tem- from behind are distracting: perature lower than +9 °C. 1. Use dimming by moving the control in Automatic defrosting can be selected under towards the passenger compartment. Climate settings Auto. rear defroster. 2. Return to normal position by moving the Select between On or Off. For a description of 03 control towards the windscreen. the menu system, see page 116. Automatic dimming* Interior rearview mirror Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dimming. The compass* can only be specified for rearview mirrors with automatic dimming, see page 149. G031427

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 93 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

General WARNING Closing, manual The panorama roof is divided into two sections. Children, other passengers or objects can Closing, automatic Only the front section can be opened - hori- be trapped by the panorama roof's moving zontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation parts. The panorama roof and curtain can be oper- position). ated in key position I or II. • Always operate the panorama roof with The panorama roof has a curtain made of per- caution. Automatic operation 03 forated fabric and located under the glass roof • Do not allow children to play with the 1. To open the curtain all the way - press the to provide extra protection from factors such controls. control rearward to the automatic opening as strong sunlight. • If leaving the car, always take the position and release. remote control key/PCC with you*, and 2. To then open the panorama roof all the way so prevent the panorama roof from - press the control rearward again to the being operated. automatic opening position and release. Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- Operating ing procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the automatic closing position instead. Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/ closed simultaneously: • To open - press the control rearward to the The panorama roof and curtain are operated automatic operation position twice and with a control located in the roof. The control release. is activated when the key is in position I or II, • To close - press the control forward to the see page 70. automatic operation position twice and

G031428 release.

Opening, automatic Opening, manual

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 94 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

Manual operation Ventilation position Closing using the remote control key or 1. To open the curtain - press the control central locking button rearward to the point of resistance for man- 1 ual opening. The curtain moves towards 2 maximum opening as long as the button is depressed. 03 2. To angle the panorama roof - press the control rearward again to the point of resistance for manual opening 3. To open the panorama roof - press the control rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening a third time. The pan- G031429 orama roof moves towards maximum Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. opening as long as the button is kept Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- depressed. One long press on the lock button, see pages trol upward. 43 (remote control key) and 50 (central locking Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- button), closes the panorama roof and all the ing procedure in reverse order - press the control down. windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and trol forward to the manual closing position When the ventilation position is selected the the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt instead. front section is raised at its rear edge. If the closing, press the lock button again. curtain is fully closed when ventilation position NOTE is selected - then it opens automatically WARNING approx. 50 mm. For manual opening, the curtain must be If closing the panorama roof with the remote fully open before the panorama roof can be control key, make sure nothing could opened. For the reverse procedure, the become trapped. panorama roof must be fully closed before the curtain can be closed.

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 95 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Petrol and diesel engines 2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. WARNING Depress the brake pedal in cars with automatic gearbox. Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the 3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button car is being towed. The steering lock could and then release it. be activated which would mean that the car cannot be steered. The starter motor works until the engine has 03 started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die- Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive* function from the car sel up to 60 seconds). while driving or during towing. If the engine has not started after 10 seconds, try again by holding in the START/STOP ENGINE button until the engine starts. NOTE G031372 The idling speed can be noticeably higher Ignition switch with remote control key, start and WARNING than normal for certain engine types during stop button (for more information, see page 70). cold starting. This is so that the emissions Always remove the remote control key from system can reach normal operating tem- IMPORTANT the ignition switch when leaving the car, perature as quickly as possible, which min- especially if there are children in the car. imises exhaust emissions and protects the Do not insert the remote control key back- environment. wards! Grip the end with the detachable key blade, Keyless drive see page 46. Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel engines. 1. For cars with remote control key, insert the remote control key into the ignition switch. Gently push in the key until it is pulled in.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car. ``

95 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 96 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

NOTE In order for the engine to start, one of the car's remote control keys with Keyless drive* function must be located in the passenger compartment or the cargo area.

03 Steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch2 and activated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. Activate the steering lock when leaving the car to reduce the risk of car theft.

2 On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the start button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver's door is opened.

96 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 97 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine – external battery

Jump starting 5. Open the clips on the front cover of the 11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and battery in your car and remove the cover, then the red. Make sure that none of the see page 241. clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal 6. Connect the red jump lead to the positive or the clamp connected to the red jump terminal on the battery in your car, lead. located under a folding plastic cover. 03 7. Connect one clamp from the black jump WARNING lead to the donor battery's negative termi- The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, nal . which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery

G021347 IMPORTANT explode. The battery contains sulphuric Connect the start cable carefully to avoid acid, which can cause serious burns. If the If the battery is flat then the car can be started short circuits with other components in the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or with current from another battery. engine compartment. clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical The following points are recommended when attention immediately. using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk 8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing of an explosion: point, (right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head) . Check that 1. Set the remote control key into position 0, the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so see page 70. that there are no sparks during the starting 2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt. procedure. 3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch 9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the off the donor car's engine in the other car engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly and ensure that the cars do not touch one higher than idle (1500 rpm). another. 10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat- 4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur- terminal on the donor battery . ing the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

97 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 98 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Manual - six-speed Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed Automatic gearbox, Geartronic

03 G031962 G031961 G031963

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each The reverse gear inhibitor prevents the possi- The information display shows the position of gear change. bility of mistakenly attempting to engage the gear selector using the following indica- • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between reverse gear during normal forward travel. tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see gear changes. Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta- page 65. tionary. • Follow the shifting pattern indicated. Gear positions For the best possible fuel economy, use the Parking position (P) highest gear possible as often as possible. Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked. The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Activate the electric parking brake by pressing the button, see page 107.

98 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 99 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

IMPORTANT on which gear is engaged just then, see the gears. At the same time it responds more page 65. quickly to acceleration. During active driving, The car must be stationary when position the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to P is selected. a delayed upshift. change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position at M. Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever Reverse (R) from D position to the end position at M. The The car must be stationary when position R is Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to change information display shifts the indication from 03 selected. down a gear and release the lever. D to S. Neutral position (N) The manual gearshift mode M can be selected Sport mode can be selected at any time while No gear is engaged and the engine can be at any time while driving. driving. started. Apply the parking brake if the car is Geartronic automatically shifts down if the stationary with the gear selector in position N. driver allows the speed to decrease lower than Geartronic - Winter mode Drive (D) a level suitable for the selected gear, in order It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and to avoid jerking and stalling. if 3rd gear is engaged manually. down takes place automatically based on the To return to automatic driving mode move the 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the level of acceleration and speed. The car must lever to the end position at D. gear lever from the D position to the end be stationary when the gear selector is moved position at M - the instrument panel display to position D from position R. NOTE shifts the indication from D to the figure 1. Geartronic – manual gear positions (M) 2. Change up to gear 3 by pushing the lever If the gearbox has a Sport programme then forward towards + (plus) twice - the display The driver can also change gear manually the gearbox will only become manual after using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The the lever has been moved forwards or back- shifts the indication from 1 to 3. car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal wards in its M position. The information dis- 3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully. is released. play then shifts the indication from S to The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car show which of the gears 1–6 is engaged. Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving moves off with a lower engine speed and the lever from D position to the end position at reduced engine power on the drive wheels. 1 M. The information display shifts the indication Geartronic - Sport mode (S) from D to one of the figures "1-6", depending The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for

1 Only on the T6 model. ``

99 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 100 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Kick-down Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Parking position (P) When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the Stationary car with engine running: way to the floor (beyond the position normally Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov- regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is ing the gear selector to another position. immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down. Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking position (P) 03 If the accelerator is released from the kick- To be able to move the gear selector from P to down position, the gearbox automatically other gear positions, the brake pedal must be changes up. depressed and the remote control key must be Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- in position II, see page 70. tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

G021351 Shiftlock – Neutral (N) Safety function If the gear selector is in the N position and the To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox The gear selector can be moved forward and car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds control program has a protective downshift back freely between N and D. Other positions (irrespective of whether the engine is running) inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- are locked with a latch that is released with the then the gear selector is locked. tion. inhibitor button on the gear selector. To be able to move the gear selector from N to Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- With the inhibitor button depressed the lever other gear positions, the brake pedal must be down which would result in an engine speed can be moved forwards or backwards between depressed and the remote control key must be high enough to damage the engine. Nothing P, R, N and D. in position II, see page 70. happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed – the original Automatic gear selector inhibitor gear remains engaged. The automatic gearbox has special safety systems: When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending Keylock on engine speed. The car changes up when the To remove the remote control key from the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the prevent damage to the engine. P position. The remote control key is locked in all other positions.

100 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 101 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Deactivating the automatic gear selector inhibitor

03 G031390

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved. Lift away the rubber mat on the floor behind the centre console and open the hatch. Fully insert the key blade. Press the key blade down and hold (For information on the key blade, see page 46.) Move the gear selector from the P position.

101 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 102 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

All-wheel drive – AWD*

All Wheel Drive is always engaged All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time. The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes 03 the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 103 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

General may be felt in the brake pedal when this is NOTE The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If engaged and this is normal. When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- one brake circuit is damaged then this will A short test of the ABS system is made auto- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level matically after the engine has been started the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to when the driver releases the brake pedal. A brake pedal is released then all braking produce the normal braking effect. further automatic test of the ABS system may ceases. 03 The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The by a brake servo. test may be experienced as pulses in the brake Symbols in the combined instrument pedal. panel WARNING Cleaning the brake discs Symbol Specification The brake servo only works when the engine Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs is running. may result in delayed brake function. This delay Constant glow – Check the is minimised by cleaning the brake linings. brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and If the brake is used when the engine is switched Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road check for the cause of the brake off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after fluid loss. must be used to brake the car. the car has been washed. Carry this out by In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy braking gently during a short period while en Constant glow for 2 seconds load the brakes can be relieved by using engine route. when the engine is started – braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used There was a fault in the brake Emergency Brake Assistance if the same gear is used downhill as up. system's ABS function when Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency the engine was last running. For more general information on heavy loads Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake on the car, see page 271. force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA system detects the driver's braking style and Anti-lock braking system increases brake force as necessary. The brake The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock force can be reinforced up to the level when the Braking System) which prevents the wheels ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is from locking during braking. This means the interrupted when the pressure on the brake ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to pedal is reduced. swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

103 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 104 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time then a fault may have arisen in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- 03 mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

104 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 105 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control - HDC*

General Function Operation HDC can be compared to an automatic engine HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of brake. When you release the accelerator on 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and downhill gradients the car is normally braked 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within by means of the engine striving for low engine the gear's speed register can be selected using idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator the steeper the road and the more load there is pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to 03 in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the braking. In order to then reduce speed the hill's gradient and without the need for the foot- driver has to assist using the footbrake. brake. The HDC function makes it possible to The brake lights come on automatically when

increase/reduce speed on steep downhill gra- G031964 the function is operating. The driver can brake dients, with a foot only on the accelerator or stop the car at any time by using the foot- pedal, without using the footbrake. The force HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch brake. on the accelerator pedal is adapted. The brake on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the HDC is deactivated: system brakes itself and automatically pro- button illuminates when the function is vides a low and even speed, so allowing the switched on. When HDC is operating the • with the on/off button on the centre con- driver to fully focus on steering. sole symbol illuminates and the display if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients shows Hill descent control ON. • with an uneven road surface and slippery sec- manual gearbox The function only operates in first gear position tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox, from a ramp. automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector gear position 1 must be selected, which is is moved to position D. shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer The function can be disengaged at any time. If WARNING display, see page 98. it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then HDC does not work in all situations, but is the braking effect will not release directly, but instead only intended to be supplementary NOTE assistance. slowly instead. HDC cannot be activated in an automatic The driver always has ultimate responsibility gearbox with the gear selector in position that the car is driven safely. D.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 106 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control - HDC*

NOTE When HDC is activated, engine response during acceleration seems slower than normal.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 107 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Parking brake, electric How to apply the parking brake ing the control. When the control is released or An electric parking brake has the same appli- the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when is interrupted. starting uphill. NOTE Function In the event of emergency braking at speeds A faint electric motor noise can be heard when above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the 03 the parking brake is being applied. The noise braking procedure. can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. Parking on a hill If the car is stationary when the parking brake If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. G021354 away from the kerb. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts Parking brake control If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the on all four wheels. Brake function changes over 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. wheels towards the kerb. to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta- 2. Press the control. How to release the parking brake tionary. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make Low battery voltage sure that the car is at a standstill position. If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. • When parking the vehicle, always engage Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic is too low, see page 97. gearbox). The symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes until the parking brake is fully applied. When the symbol illuminates the park-

ing brake is applied. G021359

In an emergency the parking brake can be Parking brake control applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-

107 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 108 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Cars with manual gearbox 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition Cars with Keyless drive function switch. Releasing manually Release manually by pressing the START/ 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition 3. Depress the brake pedal firmly. STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control. switch. 4. Pull the control. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Releasing automatically Symbols 03 3. Pull the control. 1. Put the seatbelt on. Symbol Specification 2. Start the engine. Read the message on the infor- NOTE 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R mation display The parking brake can also be released and depress the accelerator. manually by depressing the clutch pedal A flashing symbol indicates that instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- the parking brake is applied. If mends the use of the brake pedal. NOTE the symbol flashes in any other For safety reasons, the parking brake is only situation then this means that a Releasing automatically released automatically if the engine is run- fault has arisen. Read the mes- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The sage on the information display. 1. Start the engine. parking brake is released immediately on 2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel- cars with automatic gearbox when the Messages erator. accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R. IMPORTANT Heavy load uphill It is possible to release the parking brake A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the automatically, even when the gear lever is in neutral position, if the engine is running. car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while driv- Cars with automatic gearbox ing off. Release the control when the engine Releasing manually achieves traction. 1. Put the seatbelt on. G016166

108 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 109 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Park brake not fully released - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error message. Parking brake not applied - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. 03 Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the message remains. The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged. Parking brake Service required - A fault has arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains. If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox). Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake.

109 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 110 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

General NOTE WARNING HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if If HomeLink is used to operate a garage the car is locked from the outside. door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in Save the original remote controls for future motion. programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car). Do not use the HomeLink remote control for 03 any garage door that does not have safety Erase the programming for the buttons stop and safety reverse. The garage door when selling the car. must react immediately when it detects that Metallic sun visors should not be used in something is preventing its movement, and cars equipped with HomeLink. This could stop directly and reverse. A garage door have a negative effect on the HomeLink without these characteristics could cause

G029471 function. personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com. HomeLink is a programmable remote control Operation which can control up to three different devices When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- used in place of the separate original remote Programming for the first time ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so controls. The first step erases the memory in HomeLink replace their remote controls. HomeLink is and must not be carried out when only one supplied built into the left-hand sun visor. Press the programmed button to activate the individual button is being reprogrammed. garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator HomeLink's panel consists of three program- lamp illuminates for the time that the button is 1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not mable buttons and one indicator lamp. kept depressed. release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- NOTE ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and is ready to be programmed. In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the 2. Position the original remote control driver's door has been opened. 5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator lamp. The original remote controls can of course be The particular distance that is required used in parallel with HomeLink. between the original remote control and

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 111 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

HomeLink depends on the programming of ilar is not activated when the pro- Programming individual buttons the device in question. Perhaps several grammed HomeLink button is To reprogram an individual button, proceed in attempts will be required at different dis- depressed. Continue the programming accordance with the following: tances. Maintain each position for approx. in accordance with the following. 1. Depress the required button on HomeLink 15 seconds before trying a new one. 1 5. Locate the "programming button " on the and do not release until step 3 has been 3. Depress the button for the original remote receiver for the garage door for example, completed. control and the button to be programmed normally located close to the antenna's 03 2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, release the buttons until the indicator lamp culty in finding the button - consult the position the original remote control has changed over from slow to rapid flash- supplier manual or contact the supplier via 5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indi- ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful the Internet: www.homelink.com. cator lamp. programming. 6. Depress and release the "programming The particular distance that is required 4. Test the programming by depressing the button". The button flashes for approx. 30 between the original remote control and programmed button on HomeLink and seconds and the next step must be carried HomeLink depends on the programming of watching the indicator lamp: out within this period. the device in question. Perhaps several • Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 7. Depress the programmed button on attempts will be required at different dis- minates with a constant glow when the HomeLink, while the "programming but- tances. Maintain each position for approx. button is kept depressed, this indicates ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for 15 seconds before trying a new one. that the programming is complete. The approx. 3 seconds and then release. garage door, gate or similar should now Repeat the press/hold/release sequence 3. Depress the button on the original remote be activated when the programmed up to 3 times to conclude the program- control. The indicator lamp will start to HomeLink button is depressed. ming. flash. When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing - release Glow not constant: The indicator lamp • both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant successful programming. glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- 4. Test the programming by depressing the ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds programmed button on HomeLink and and indicates that the device has a "roll- watching the indicator lamp: ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 112 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 7. Depress the programmed button on minates with a constant glow when the HomeLink, while the "programming but- button is kept depressed, this indicates ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for that the programming is complete. The approx. 3 seconds and then release. garage door, gate or similar should now Repeat the press/hold/release sequence be activated when the programmed up to 3 times to conclude the program- HomeLink button is depressed. 03 ming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds Erasing programming and then changes over to a constant It is only possible to erase the programming for glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds buttons. and indicates that the device has a "roll- ± Depress the two outer buttons and do not ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- release until the indicator lamp starts to ilar is not activated when the pro- flash after approx. 20 seconds. grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming > HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn in accordance with the following. mode" and is ready to be programmed once more, see page 110. 5. Locate the "programming button 2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier manual or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com. 6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 113 evastarck

03 Your driving environment

113 114 evastarck XC60 (Y413);9;3 * Option/accessory, formoreinformation, seeIntroduction. Built-in phone* Bluetooth handsfree* Comfort insidethepassenger BLIS* –BlindSpot 182 Parking camera*...... 179 Park assistsyst*...... Driver AlertSystem- 173 Driver AlertSystem–DAC*...... Collision WarningwithAuto City Safety™ 159 Distance Alert...... Adaptive cruisecontrol* Cruise control* Adapting drivingcharacteristics DSTC –Stabilityandtraction 149 Compass*...... 147 Trip computer...... Audio system Fuel-driven additionalheater and passengercompartment Fuel-driven engineblockheater 121 Climate control...... Menus andmessages ...... 162 ...... 133 ...... 152 ...... 197 ...... Information System ...... 192 ...... D*...... 176 LDW*...... 116 ...... 153 ...... Brake* ...... 132 *...... control system heater* compartment ...... 151 ...... 167 ...... 129 ...... 185 ...... 189 ...... 150 ...... 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page114

G020908 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 115 evastarck

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 116 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Centre console ENTER – selects menu options The search paths to the menu system's functions are stated in the form: Car settings Some functions are controlled from the centre Numerical keypad 1–9 console via the menu system or via the keypad Lock settings, which presupposes that following is carried out before: in the steering wheel. Each function is descri- Steering wheel keypad* bed under its respective section. 1. Press MENU. The current menu level is shown at the top right 2. Scroll to the required menu, e.g. Car of the centre console's display. settings, using the navigation buttons and Centre console controls press ENTER. 3. Scroll to the required submenu, e.g. Lock 04 settings, and press ENTER. The navigation buttons can be used instead of ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT. The menu options are numbered and can also ENTER be selected directly with the numerical keypad EXIT (only 1–9). Navigation buttons – up/down. Menu overview The phone and audio sources each have sep- Centre console with controls for menu navigation. If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and arate main menus. An audio source main menu Navigation button – scrolls and selects EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation (e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par- among menu options buttons, have the same functions as the con- ticular audio source is active, see page 135. MENU – leads to the menu system trols in the centre console. The following menu options are included in EXIT – leads back one step in the menu Search paths Main menu: structure. A long press leads out from the Access to some functions is provided directly Car Key memory menu system. via the function buttons and some are reached via the menu system. Seat & mirror positions*

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 117 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Car settings Equalizer front All discs5 Fold mirr. when locking* Equalizer rear CD settings Collision warning settings* Auto. volume control Disc text* Information Reset all audio settings News Light settings Main menu FM TP (Traffic information) Lock settings FM settings Audio settings2 Reduced guard1 News Main menu AUX Parking camera settings* TP (Traffic information) AUX input volume 04 Steering force level* Radio text Audio settings2 Tyre pressure PTY (Program type) Main menu USB Unit settings Advanced radio settings USB settings Climate settings Audio settings2 News Automatic blower adjust Main menu DAB*3 TP (Traffic information) Auto. rear defroster Main menu CD Audio settings2 Recirculation timer Random Main menu iPod Reset climate settings Off iPod settings Main menu AM Folder4 News Audio settings Disc4 TP (Traffic information) Sound stage Single disc5 Audio settings2

1 Available in certain models. 2 For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings". 3 See page 143. 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 118 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main menu, Bluetooth Phone book IDIS Last 10 missed calls New contact Reset Phone settings Last 10 received calls Search Last 10 dialled calls Copy all Combined instrument panel Phone book Erase SIM Search Erase phone Copy fr. mobile phone Memory status Bluetooth* Messages 04 Connect phone Read Change phone Write new Remove phone Message settings

Phone settings Call options G021364

Call options Send my number Information display and controls for menus. Sounds and volume Call waiting READ – access to message list and mes- Synchronise phone book Automatic answer sage confirmation. Thumbwheel – browse between menu Main menu, built-in phone Voice mail number options. Call register Diversions RESET – reset the active function. Used in Last 10 missed calls Phone settings certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective Last 10 received calls Network selection function. Last 10 dialled calls SIM security The menus shown on the information displays Erase list Edit PIN code in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. The Call duration Sounds and volume menus shown depend on key position, see

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 119 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages page 70. If a message appears then this must Message Message Specification be acknowledged with READ for the menus to be shown. Stop safely Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of 6 Menu overview damage. Contact an To empty fuel tank authorised Volvo work- Average shop. Instantaneous Stop engine Stop and switch off the Average speed engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an Lane departure warning authorised Volvo work- 04

Tyre pressure Calibration G021365 shop. City Safety Text message in the information display. Service urgent Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo Current speed When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message workshop immediately. Park heat timer 1/2 appears on the information display. An error Service Have the car checked message is stored in a memory list until the Park vent timer 1/2 required by an authorised Volvo fault is rectified. Park timer mode workshop as soon as Press READ to acknowledge and browse possible. Direct start Park heat between the messages. Direct start Park el.heat See manual Read the owner's manual. Direct start Park vent NOTE Book time for Time to book regular Additional heat auto If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must maintenance service at an authorised Rest heat start be read (press READ) before the previous Volvo workshop. activity can be resumed. DSTC

6 Certain menu options*. ``

119 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 120 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Specification Time for regular Time for regular service maintenance at an authorised Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade. 04 Maintenance If the service intervals overdue are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for service.

Temporarily A function has been OFF temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Power save The audio system is mode switched off to save energy. Charge the battery.

120 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 121 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

General Sensor location air conditioning can be temporarily switched • The sun sensor* is located on the top side off. There may then be a temporary increase in Air conditioning of the dashboard. temperature in the passenger compartment. The car is equipped with Electronic Climate The temperature sensor for the passenger Control* (ECC) or Electronic Temperature Con- • Condensation compartment is located below the climate In warm weather, condensation from the air trol (ETC). The climate control system cools or control panel. heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas- conditioning may drip under the car. This is senger compartment. • The outside temperature sensor is located normal. on the door mirror. NOTE • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- Ice and snow rior rearview mirror. Remove ice and snow from the climate control The air conditioning can be switched off, but system air intake (the grille between the bonnet 04 to ensure the best possible climate comfort and the windscreen). in the passenger compartment and to pre- NOTE vent the windows from misting, it should Do not cover or block the sensors with Fault tracing and repair always be on. clothing or other objects. Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo work- Actual temperature Side windows and sunroof shop only. The temperature you select corresponds to the To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- Refrigerant physical experience with reference to factors mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro- The climate control system contains R134a such as air speed, humidity and solar radia- priate, should be closed. tion* in and around the car. refrigerant, see also page 273. This refrigerant Misting windows contains no chlorine, which means that it is The system includes a sun sensor* which Remove misting on the insides of the windows harmless to the ozone layer. Have an author- detects on which side the sun is shining into by primarily using the defroster function. ised Volvo workshop carry out the filling/ the passenger compartment. This means that changing of refrigerant. the temperature can differ between the right To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win- and left-hand air vents despite the controls dows clean and use window cleaner. Total airing function being set for the same temperature on both The function opens/closes all side windows sides. Temporary shut-off of the air simultaneously and can be used for example to conditioning quickly air the car during hot weather, see When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full page 44. acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 122 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Passenger compartment filter is reduced gradually due to reduced need • Fan speed in automatic mode*, see All air entering the car's passenger compart- up until the car is 4 years old. page 125. ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fully • Recirculation timer for passenger com- replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo automatic system that cleans the air in the partment air, see page 126. Service Programme for the recommended passenger compartment from contami- • Automatic rear window defrosting, see replacement intervals. If the car is used in a nants such as particles, hydrocarbons, page 91. severely contaminated environment, it may be nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. necessary to replace the filter more often. All climate control system functions are set to Use of tested materials in the interior original position with RESET via the display. NOTE equipment. The materials have been developed in order to Air distribution 04 There are different types of passenger com- minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger partment filter. Make sure that the correct compartment and they contribute to making filter is fitted. the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger com- Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* partment and the cargo area are removable This option keeps the passenger compartment and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- agents and car care products recommended stances. For more information on CZIP, see the by Volvo, see page 265. brochure included with the purchase of the car. The following is included: NOTE • An enhanced fan function that means that In cars with CZIP the IAQS air filter must be G032070 the fan starts when the car is opened with replaced every 15000 km or once per year. the remote control key. The fan fills the In cars without CZIP the IAQS air filter must passenger compartment with fresh air. The be replaced at the normal service. The incoming air is divided between function starts when required and is dis- 20 different vents in the passenger compartment. engaged automatically after a time or when Menu settings one of the passenger compartment doors It is possible to change the default settings for Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO is opened. The amount of time the fan runs three of the climate control system's functions mode*. via the centre console, see page 116:

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 123 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

If necessary it can be controlled manually, see Air vents in the door pillars Climate control page 127. Electronic Temperature Control, ETC Air vents in the dashboard

04 G033202

Closed G031437 Open Fan Open Lateral airflow Air distribution Closed Vertical airflow Heated front seats, left-hand side Lateral airflow Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist- Heated front seats, right-hand side Vertical airflow ing. Temperature control Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents into the passenger compartment remove misting. to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off seat. A certain air flow always comes from the vents Rear window and door mirror defrosters, see page 91 in order to maintain a good climate in the pas- NOTE senger compartment. Max. defroster Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts. Recirculation

123 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 124 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC Recirculation/Air quality system Press the button three times for the lowest heat level – one lamp illuminates. Temperature control, left-hand side Press the button four times to switch off the heat – no lamps illuminate. Operation Rear seats Fan 1 Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The 04 previously set fan speed is G033203 disengaged. Fan NOTE Air distribution If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- Heated front seats, left-hand side tioning is not engaged which may result in a G021376 risk of misting windows. AUTO Heat control takes place in the same way as for the front seat 2. Heated front seats, right-hand side Heated seats* Temperature control, right-hand side Front seats Air distribution Press the button once for the The figure consists of three AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off highest heat level – three buttons. When the buttons are pressed a lamp in front of Rear window and door mirror defrosters, lamps illuminate. the respective part of the fig- see page 91 Press the button twice for a ure illuminates and shows Max. defroster lower heat level – two lamps which air distribution is illuminate. selected, see page 127.

1 Only applies to ECC. 2 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 125 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Auto1 Temperature control Defroster The Auto function automati- ECC: The temperatures on Used to quickly remove mist- cally regulates temperature, the driver and passenger ing and ice from the wind- air conditioning, fan speed, sides can be set independ- screen and side windows. Air recirculation, and air distribu- ently. flowing to the windows. The light in the defroster button tion. ETC: The whole of the pas- illuminates when the function senger compartment is regu- is active. If you select one or more manual functions, the lated using the knob. The following also takes place in order to pro- other functions continue to be controlled auto- When the car is started, the most recent setting vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and is resumed. all manual settings are switched off when ger compartment: 04 AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO NOTE • the air conditioning is automatically CLIMATE. engaged Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by Fan speed in automatic mode can be set under selecting a higher/lower temperature than • recirculation and the air quality system are Climate settings Automatic blower the actual temperature required. automatically disengaged. adjust. Select between Low, Normal or The air conditioning can be disengaged man- High. AC – Air conditioning on/off ually using the AC button. When the defroster function is switched off the climate control sys- For a description of the menu system, see ON: The air conditioning is tem returns to the previous settings. page 116. controlled by the system's Auto function. This way, Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow • incoming air is cooled and is prioritised. dehumidified. • Normal - Automatic fan control. OFF: When the defroster • High - Automatic fan control. A more function is activated the air conditioning is intense airflow is prioritised. switched on automatically (can be switched off using the AC button).

1 Only applies to ECC. ``

125 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 126 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Recirculation/Air quality system Timer Activating recirculation/air quality 3 Recirculation With the timer function activated the system sensor ECC - The right-hand orange will exit manually activated recirculation mode Switch between the three light in the button illuminates according to a time that depends on the out- functions by pressing the but- when recirculation is side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, ton repeatedly. engaged. The function is misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the selected to shut out bad air, function under Climate settings exhaust gases etc. from the Recirculation timer. For a description of the menu system, see page 116. passenger compartment. The • The left-hand orange lamp illuminates – the air in the passenger compartment is recircula- air quality sensor is disengaged. There is 04 ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when NOTE no recirculation, only fresh air. this function is activated. When Defroster is selected, recirculation is • The centre green lamp illuminates – recir- ETC - The right-hand orange always deactivated. culation not engaged, providing it is not light in the button illuminates required for cooling in hot weather. when recirculation is Air quality system* • The right-hand orange lamp illuminates – engaged. The function is The air quality system sepa- recirculation is engaged. selected to shut out bad air, rates gases and particles to exhaust gases etc. from the reduce the levels of odours NOTE passenger compartment. The and pollution in the passenger The air quality sensor should always be air in the passenger compartment is recircula- compartment. If the outside ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when engaged in order to obtain the best air in the air is contaminated then the passenger compartment. this function is activated. air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. When the AUTO button is Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting. NOTE depressed the air quality sensor is always engaged. If the insides of the windows start misting If the air in the car recirculates for too long, up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the there is a risk of misting on the insides of the defroster functions for the windscreen, the windows. side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.

3 Only applies to ECC.

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 127 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Activating recirculation tion3 On/Off by pressing the button repeatedly. Switch between recircula- The lamp illuminates when recirculation is engaged.

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use 04 Air to windows. Some air to remove ice and misting Air to the floor and win- to ensure comfortable flows from the air vents. quickly. dows. Some air flows conditions and good The air is not recirculated. from the dashboard air demisting in cold or Air conditioning is always vents. humid weather. engaged.

Air to windscreen and to prevent misting and Air to floor and from dash- in sunny weather with side windows. Some air icing in a cold and humid board air vents. cool outside tempera- flows from the air vents. climate, (not at too low fan tures. speed to enable this).

3 Only applies to ECC. ``

127 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 128 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Airflow to windows and to ensure good comfort in Air to floor. Some air flows to direct heat or cold to from dashboard air vents. warm, dry weather. to the dashboard air vents the floor and windows.

Airflow to the head and to ensure efficient cooling Airflow to windows, from to provide cooler air along chest from the dashboard in warm weather. dashboard air vents and the floor or warmer air 04 air vents. to the floor. higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

128 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 129 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Fuel-driven heater Refuelling Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel General information about the parking WARNING! ACHTUNG! level is too low, the parking heater will be heater AVERTISSEMENT! switched off automatically and a message The parking heater heats the engine and pas- appears on the information display. Acknowl- senger compartment and can be started edge the message by pressing the indicator directly or with the timer. stalk READ button once, see page 130. Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car IMPORTANT is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- Repeated use of the parking heater com- tem calculates when heating should be started bined with short journeys may discharge the 04

based on the outside temperature. G031391 battery and impair starting.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- Warning decal on fuel filler flap. The car should be driven for the same time ture exceeds 15 °C. At –10 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace maximum running time of the parking heater is WARNING 50 minutes. the energy consumed by the heater when it Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch is used on a regular basis. WARNING off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. The car must be outdoors when the parking Check the information display to see that heater is used. the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows NOTE Park heat ON. When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- Parking on a hill ing, which is perfectly normal. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 130 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Operation Sym- Display Specification Sym- Display Specification bol bol Fuel The heater is Heater The heater has been heater ON switched on and run- unavail. stopped by the car's

G025102 ning. G025102 Low fuel electronics in order level to facilitate starting Timer is Reminder that the the engine and set for heater will start at about 50 km driving.

G025102 Fuel the set time after the heater car has been left, Park Heater not working. 04 when the remote heater Contact an author- G021364

control key is G025102 Service ised Volvo workshop removed from the required for repair. READ button ignition switch. A display text clears automatically after a time Thumbwheel Heater The heater has been or after one press on the indicator stalk stopped stopped by the car's RESET button READ button.

G025102 Low bat- electronics in order For more information on the information dis- tery to facilitate starting play and READ, see page 118. the engine. Direct start and immediate stop 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start Symbols and display messages Park heat. When one of the timer's settings or 2. Press RESET to select between ON and Direct start is activated, the infor- OFF. mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates while the information display ON: Parking heater switched on manually or shows an explanatory text and a further illumi- with programmed timer. nated symbol. The table shows symbols and OFF: Parking heater switched off. display texts that appear. Following the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 131 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Heating of the passenger compartment will 5. Select the required minute using the Clock/timer begin as soon as the engine coolant has thumbwheel. The heater's time is connected to the car's reached the correct temperature. 6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting. clock. NOTE 7. Press RESET to activate the timer. NOTE The car can be started and driven while the After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start All timer programming will be cleared if the parking heater is running. time can be programmed with Park heat timer car's clock is reset. 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Setting the timer Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1. The time when the car shall be used and heated 04 is specified with the timer. Deactivating a timer-started heater Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows: NOTE 1. Press READ. The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position I, 2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text see page 70. Park heat timer 1 or 2. > The text ON flashes on the display. 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat 3. Press RESET. timer 1. > The text OFF is shown with a constant 2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- glow and the heater is switched OFF. ing hours setting. A timer-started heater can be switched off in 3. Select the required hour using the thumb- accordance with the instructions in the section wheel. "Direct start and immediate stop", see 4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- page 130. ing minutes setting.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 132 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven additional heater*

Additional heater (diesel) NOTE When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for short distances if required. 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional 04 heat auto.

G021364 2. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF. READ button Passenger compartment heater* Thumbwheel If the additional heater is supplemented with RESET button timer function then it will be a fuel-driven passenger compartment heater, see page 129. In diesel-engined cars the additional heater may be required for achieving the correct temperature in the passenger compartment during cold weather. The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running. The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 133 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

General NOTE Information display The audio system can be equipped with differ- Remove the remote control key from the Centre console control panel ent options and is one of the following three ignition switch if the audio system is used basic versions: when the engine is switched off. This is to Control panel with headphones socket* • Performance avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily. • High Performance Steering wheel keypad • Premium Sound If the audio system is active when the engine is The system version is shown in the display switched off then it is activated automatically when the audio system is started. next time the engine is started. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby 04 symbol are trademarks of Dolby Overview Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Remote control key and ignition G021399 positions Confirm selection in menu system, accept The audio system can be used without the phone call. remote control key in the ignition switch for 15 minutes at a time. Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current function, end/refuse phone calls, clear

5 G031438 entered characters.

Input for external audio source; AUX and Volume USB (e.g. iPod)1 A short press scrolls between CD tracks or Steering wheel keypad preset radio stations. A long press fast- winds CD tracks or seeks the next available radio station.

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 134 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Rear control panel with headphones Activating/deactivating Store favourite functions with MY KEY socket The control panel is activated with MODE. Headphones with an impedance of Deactivation is possible via a long press on 16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher MODE or when the engine is switched off. are recommended for best sound reproduc- Scroll/search forward and backward tion. A short press on scrolls between CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press fast- winds CD tracks or seeks the next available radio station. 04 Limitations • The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played G031439 back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel. 1. Navigate to the function to be stored in the menu. Only a selection of the functions can Menus and MY KEY2 be stored. Some functions are controlled from the menu 2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than system in the centre console. For more infor- 2 seconds. VOLUME – Volume, left and right. mation on menus, see page 116. For informa- The following functions can be stored tion on the audio system's functions together Scroll/search forward and backward. with MY KEY: with BluetoothTM handsfree or phone, see MODE - Select between AM, FM, CD, page 194. CD/CD changer AUX, USB*/iPod, DAB1/DAB2* and On/ • Random Off. For connection via AUX or USB, see • News page 133. • TP Headphones sockets (3.5 mm). • Track information

2 MY KEY is not available if the car is equipped with built-in phone as an option.

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 135 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

FM Audio functions speed. The level of compensation can be set • News at low, medium or high. Select the level under • TP Audio settings Auto. volume control. • Radio text Audio controls • Search PTY Press the control repeatedly to browse • Show PTY text among the following listed options. Adjustment Audio settings is made by turning the control. • Audio mode NOTE • Auto. volume control Press MENU to access other audio set- 04 Activate the stored function with a short press

G031440 tings. For more information, see page 116. on MY KEY. Centre console, controls for audio functions. • Bass - Bass level. AM, FM and CD - Internal audio sources. • Treble - Treble level. MODE - Scroll between external audio • Fader – Balance between the front and sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*). rear speakers. For connection via AUX or USB, see page 133. • Balance – Balance between the left and right-hand speakers. SOUND – Push button and knob controls Subwoofer* – Subwoofer level. MIN for adjusting the sound pattern. • deactivates the subwoofer. Navigation button VOLUME - Volume and On/Off.

Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in proportion to vehicle

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 136 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

button. Press / to select another External audio source audio volume wavelength. The AUX input can be used for connecting an MP3 player which has no USB connection for 2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close. example, see page 133. Sound stage* The sound experience can be optimised for the NOTE driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. Select one of the options under The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is Audio settings Sound stage. in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket. Optimum sound reproduction 04 G031960 The audio system is calibrated for optimum The audio source connected to the AUX input Subwoofer location. sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. may have a different volume to the internal • Surround* – Surround settings. audio sources. Correct this by adjusting the Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby This calibration takes into account loudspeak- input volume of the AUX input: Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- 1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using selecting 3-channel or DPLII respectively. MODE and navigate with to AUX input This enables the following options: bination of car model and audio system. volume. • Centre level* – Level for centre speaker. There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, 2. Turn the control or press / the Surround level* – Level for surround. • radio reception and vehicle speed. navigation button. Equalizer* The controls explained in these operating The equalizer can be used to adjust different Resetting the audio functions instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and frequency bands separately. All audio settings can be reset to the original Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be factory settings. 1. Go to Audio settings and select able to adapt the sound reproduction accord- Equalizer front or Equalizer rear. ing to personal taste. ± The reset is carried out in FM mode under Audio settings Advanced audio sett. The sound level for the wavelength is Reset all. adjusted with / on the navigation

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 137 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

AUX, USB and iPod* 2. Connect your iPod, MP3 player or USB NOTE memory stick to the USB connection in the General centre console's storage compartment The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. (see preceding illustration). However, there are variants of these file for- The text Loading is shown in the display when mats that are not supported by the system. the system is loading the storage media's file The system also supports the majority of structure. This takes a moment. iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported. Once loading is complete, track information is shown on the display and the desired track can USB memory be selected. To facilitate use of a USB memory, only store 04 A track can be selected in two ways: music files on it. It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that contains 1. Turn TUNING clockwise or anticlock- G031959 anything other than compatible music files. wise An iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the car's infotainment system via the AUX socket or 2. or use the navigation control's right or NOTE the USB connection in the centre console. left-hand button to scroll to the required The system supports removable media The AUX input enables the connection of an track. which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 It is also possible to change track using the file system FAT32. The player or USB mem- player. steering wheel keypad ory stick can hold a maximum of 500 folders and 64 000 files, and must have a capacity If you choose to connect an iPod, MP3 player In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system of at least 128 Mb. or a USB memory stick to the USB connection operates in an equivalent way to the CD player then you can control the media via the car's playing back music files. For more information, MP3 player audio controls. see page 139. Many MP3 players have their own file systems Use the MODE button to select: that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set 1. If USB is selected then Connect Device in USB Removable device/Mass Storage is shown in the display. For information on Device mode. the AUX input, see page 133.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 138 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

iPod CD functions place then playback is started automatically. An iPod is charged and supplied with power Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD. by the USB connection, via the player's connection cable. However, if the player's battery Starting playback (CD changer) is fully discharged then it must be charged If a CD position with a music CD is already before being connected. selected when CD is pressed then playback starts automatically. Otherwise, select a disc NOTE with the number buttons 1-6 or / on the navigation button. When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu Insert a CD (CD changer) 04 structure that is similar to the iPod player's 1. Select an empty position with the number own menu structure. G031443 buttons 1-6 or / on the navigation button. For information on USB/iPod in combination Centre console, controls for CD functions. with Performance audio, see the accessory CD eject An empty position is marked on the dis- manual for USB and iPod Music Interface. play. The text Insert disc shows that a new CD insertion/eject slot disc can be inserted. The CD changer can Fast-wind and change CD track hold up to six CDs. 2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot. Navigation button for changing CD tracks Disc eject Scan CD A CD will stay in the ejected position for CD changer position selection (only approx. 12seconds. Following which it is re- applies to the High Performance and Pre- inserted in the player and playback continues. mium Sound audio systems)* Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- Starting playback (CD player) ton. Start CD playback by pressing the CD button. Eject all discs with a long press on the eject If a music CD is in the player when this takes button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 139 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Pause continues. Directory change takes place auto- Different messages appear depending on When the volume is lowered all the way, the CD matically when all files in the current directory which random function has been selected: have been played back. player stops if no one is using headphones. • RANDOM means that the tracks from only When the volume is increased, it starts again. Fast wind/change CD tracks and one music CD are played Audio files3 compressed audio files • RND ALL means that all tracks on all The CD player also supports compressed Short presses / on the navigation button music CDs in the CD changer* are played. audio files in MP3 and WMA formats. are used to scroll between CD tracks or com- • RANDOM FOLDER means that the compressed audio files. Long presses are used to pressed audio files in a directory on the NOTE fast-wind CD tracks or compressed audio files. current CD are played back. The steering wheel keypad can also be used Some copy protected audio files may not be CD player 04 read by the player. for this purpose. Track change can also be If a normal music CD is being played, activate/ made by turning TUNING. deactivate under Random. When a CD with audio files is inserted into the Scan CD If a disc with compressed audio files is being player the disc's file structure is loaded. This function plays back the first ten seconds played back, activate/deactivate under Depending on the quality of the disc and the of each CD track or compressed audio file. Random Folder. quantity of information there may be a delay Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or CD changer before playback starts. SCAN to continue playback of the current CD If a normal music CD is being played under track or compressed audio file. Navigation and playback Random Single disc or Random All If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD Random discs. The All discs option applies to all music player then ENTER leads to the disc's file This function plays the tracks in random order. CDs in the changer. structure. The file structure is navigated in the The random CD tracks or compressed audio If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/ same way as the audio system's menu struc- files can be scrolled through in the normal way. ture. Audio files have the symbol and deactivate under Random Folder. If you select another CD the function is deactivated. directories have the symbol . Start audio NOTE file playback with ENTER. It is only possible to scroll between random Track information When the playback of a file is finished the play- CD tracks on the current disc. If track information is stored on a music CD back of the other files in the same directory then it can be shown on the display. This also

3 High Performance and Premium Sound ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 140 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium Tuning, automatic 2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring.. appears Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac- 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM. on the display. tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track 2. Press / on the navigation button. Once Autostoring.. disappears from the dis- information. play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- Tuning, manual ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the Radio functions 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM. display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons. 2. Turn TUNING. Automatic preset storage can be cancelled Preset using EXIT. 10 station presets can be stored per wave- Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam- 04 length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1 ple AUTO or FM. and FM2. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons. Returning to Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets: Preset storage can be carried out manually or automatically. 1. Press AUTO. > Auto appears on the display. Preset storage, manual G031441 1. Set a station or frequency. 2. Press a preset button. Centre console, controls for radio functions. 2. Hold in a station preset button until the Scan wavelength Navigation button for tuning, automatic message Channel stored appears on the The function automatically searches the cur- display. rent wavelength for strong stations. When a Cancel function in progress Preset storage, automatic station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec- Tuning, manual The function is especially useful in areas where onds before scanning is resumed. Scan wavelength the radio stations and their frequencies are 1. Select wavelength using AM or FM. unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are Preset storage, automatic stored automatically in a separate memory. 2. Press SCAN. Autostoring does not affect the manually SCAN appears on the display. Close using Preset buttons and preset storage, manual stored stations. SCAN or EXIT. Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM. FM2)

140 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 141 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

RDS functions (EON and REG), see page 142. Press EXIT to through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters return to the interrupted audio source. function is active. into a network. An FM transmitter in such a ± Activate/deactivate under FM settings network sends information that gives an RDS Alarm News. radio the following functions: This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be • Automatically switches to a stronger trans- temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The News from selected/all stations mitter if reception in the area is poor. message ALARM! appears on the display The radio can interrupt with news only from the • Searches for programme type, e.g. news. when an alarm message is transmitted. pre-selected station or all stations within the same network. Receives text information on current radio • Traffic information – TP programme. ± Go to FM settings Advanced radio This function allows traffic information sent 04 within a set station's RDS network to break settings News station to change. NOTE through. The TP symbol indicates that the Programme types – PTY Some radio stations do not use RDS or only function is activated. If the set station can send some if its functionality. The PTY function can be used to select differ- traffic information then appears on the ent programme types, such as pop music and display. serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that If a required programme type is located the ± Activate/deactivate under FM settings the function is active. This function allows pro- radio can switch stations interrupting the audio TP. gramme types broadcast within a set station's source currently in use. For example, if the CD RDS network to break through. player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting TP from selected station/all stations transmission is played at a preset volume, see 1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro- The radio can interrupt with traffic information page 142. The radio returns to the previous gramme type under FM settings PTY only from the pre-selected station or all sta- audio source and volume when the set pro- Select PTY. tions within the same network. gramme type is no longer broadcast. 2. FM ± Go to FM settings Advanced radio Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under The programme functions alarm (ALARM), traf- settings Clear all PTY. fic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro- settings TP TP Station to change. gramme types(PTY) interrupt one another in PTY search News order of priority, where alarm has the highest This function searches the entire wavelength This function allows news broadcasts sent priority and programme types has the lowest. for the selected programme type. For further programme interruption settings within a set station's RDS network to break

141 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 142 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

1. Select one or more PTYs under FM Advanced radio settings ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select- settings PTY Select PTY. ing one of the options under FM settings Automatic frequency update – AF Advanced radio settings EON: 2. Go to FM settings PTY Search This function selects one of the strongest PTY. transmitters for a set station. The function may • Local – interrupts only if the radio station need to search through the entire FM wave- transmitter is close. If the radio finds any of the selected pro- length to find a strong transmitter. If this 4 gramme types, >| To seek appears on the • Distant – interrupts if the station trans- occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek appears mitter is far away, even if the signal is weak. display. on the display. Press EXIT to cancel, which is • Off – no interruption for programmes from ± To continue searching for another broad- also shown in the display. other transmitters. cast of the selected programme types, ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM 04 press on the navigation button. Resetting RDS functions settings Advanced radio settings All radio settings can be reset to the original Display of programme type AF. factory settings. The programme type of the current station can Regional radio programmes - Regional be shown on the display. ± The reset is carried out in FM mode under This function causes the radio to continue with FM settings Advanced radio settings ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM a regional transmitter even if its signal strength Reset all. settings PTY Show PTY is low. The symbol Regional shows that the function is active. Volume control, programme types Radio text ± FM The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS Some RDS stations transmit information on Activate/deactivate in FM mode under settings Advanced radio settings or TP, are heard at the volume selected for programme content, artists, etc. This informa- each respective programme type. If the volume Regional. tion can be shown on the display. level is adjusted during the programme inter- ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Enhanced Other Networks – EON ruption, the new level is saved until the next Radio text. This function is useful in urban areas with many programme interruption. There is, however, a regional radio stations. It allows the distance minimum level. between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source.

4 Factory settings.

142 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 143 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Menu structure FM Other music 1.5.3 AF Main menu FM Weather & metro 1.5.4 EON FM settings Finance Off 1.1 News Children's programs Local 1.2 TP (Traffic information) Social affairs Distant 1.3 Radio text Religion 1.5.5 Regional 1.4 PTY (Program type) Phone in 1.5.6 Reset FM sett. 1.4.1 Select PTY Travel & touring 04 Clear all PTY Leisure & hobby Radio system - DAB* Current affairs Jazz music General Information Country music DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. Sport National music Education Oldies music NOTE Drama Folk music This system does not support DAB+. Culture & Art Documentary Science Alarm test Service and Ensemble • Service - Channel, radio channel (only Varied speech !!Alarm!! audio services are supported by the sys- Pop music 1.4.2 Search PTY tem). Ensemble - A collection of radio channels Rock music 1.4.3 Show PTY text • on the same frequency. Easy listening 1.5. Advanced radio settings Light classic 1.5.1 TP station Classical 1.5.2 News station

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 144 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) • Ensemble list - Shows channel groups If one or more subchannels are broadcast then When the vehicle is moved to a new broad- that the receiver has obtained via channel the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan- casting area, programming of existing channel group programming. nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi- groups in the area can take place. • Service list - Shows channels irrespective cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the display. Programming of channel groups creates an of the channel group to which they are allo- updated list of all available channel groups. cated. The list can also be filtered using To access a subchannel: DAB PTY (see below). The list is not updated automatically. Program- ± Press ming takes place via the Ensemble learn • Subchannel list - Subchannels to a menu or directly by means of a long press on selected channel. To navigate between subchannels: AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a The lists can be accessed via the menu. The ± Press or 04 channel group if both Band III and LBand are channel groups can also be accessed by selected. pressing ENTER. Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other Wavelength Scanning one without selecting it. DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths5; Band Scanning means that all channels in the list are III and LBand. played for 10 seconds each. DAB PTY (program type) DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro- • Band III – over the whole country6 ± Press SCAN to activate. gramme. There are 29 different programme • LBand - mainly in large cities Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY types which also include different programme By selecting for example Band III on its own, mode. In which case only channels of the pre- categories. After selecting a programme type, channel programming takes place more selected programme type are played. navigation only takes place within the channels quickly than if both Band III and LBand are ± Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or broadcasting that type. selected. It is not certain that all channel by pressing EXIT. Exit this mode as follows: groups will be found. Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories. Subchannel ± Press EXIT Secondary components are usually named It is also possible to select a preset channel or Navigation via lists subchannels. These are temporary and can exit DAB-PTY via the menu. In certain cases There are three types of basic list which can be contain e.g. translations of the main pro- DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to used for navigation: gramme into other languages. DAB linking (see below) is implemented.

5 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths. 6 During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.

144 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 145 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

DAB to DAB link channel will be played. The preset is not 4.6. Education dependent on the channel list. It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no 4.7. Drama reception to the same channel in another chan- A saved channel does not have to be in the 4.8. Culture & Art nel group with better reception. There may be channel list for it to be playable. If the channel a certain delay when changing channel group. is loaded when it is not available then a preset 4.9. Science There may be a period of silence between the number is shown and there is silence until an 4.10. Varied speech current channel no longer being available to the available preset is selected for loading. Alter- new channel becoming available. natively another channel. 4.11. Pop music DAB display settings 4.12 Rock music NOTE 1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if 4.13. Easy listening 04 a primary component is being played. A The audio system's DAB system does not subchannel name is shown if it is a sub- support all functions available in the DAB 4.14. Light classic channel being played standard. 4.15. Serious classic 2. Ensemble mode - Adds the channel 4.16. Other music group name to the channel name Menu structure DAB 4.17. Weather & metro 3. Ensemble + PTY - Adds the programme Main menu DAB 4.18. Finance type name under the channel name 1. Select ensemble 4.19 Children's programs Preset 2. Select service 10 station presets can be stored per wave- 4.20. Social affairs 3. Select subchannel length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: 4.21. Religion DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are 4. DAB PTY 4.22. Phone in selected using the preset buttons. 4.1. DAB PTY off 4.23. Travel & touring A preset contains one channel but no sub- 4.2. News channels. If a subchannel is being played and 4.24. Leisure & hobby 4.3. Current affairs a preset is saved then only the channel ID is 4.25. Jazz music registered. This is because subchannels are 4.4. Information temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the 4.26. Country music 4.5. Sport preset, the channel which contained the sub- 4.27. National music

145 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 146 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

4.28. Oldies music 4.29. Folk music 4.30. Documentary 4.31. Alarm test 4.32. !!Alarm!! 5. Ensemble learn 6. DAB settings 6.1. DAB settings 04 6.1.1. Ensemble name 6.1.2. Ensemble name and PTY 6.1.3. Basic 6.2. DAB to DAB link 6.3. FM traffic 6.4. Select DAB band 6.4.1. Band III 6.4.2. LBand 6.4.3. LBand & Band III 6.5. Reset DAB

146 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 147 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

General Functions Average The average fuel consumption since the last NOTE reset. Reset using RESET. If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must NOTE be acknowledged in order to revert to the There may be a slight error in the reading if trip computer function. Acknowledge by a fuel-driven additional 1, and/or parking pressing READ. heater* has been used.

To change unit specified for distance and Km to empty tank speed, contact an authorised Volvo workshop. The calculation is based on the average fuel 04 G021364 Current speed* consumption over the last 30 km and the Information display and controls. The instrument panel display shows current remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display shows the approximate distance that can be READ - confirms speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the Thumbwheel – browse between menus mph then the current speed is shown in km/h. tank. No guaranteed range remains when the and options in the trip computer list display shows " --- km to empty tank". Refuel Average speed as soon as possible. RESET – resets The car calculates the average speed from the To scroll through trip computer information, last resetting. Reset using RESET. NOTE turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con- There may be a slight error in the reading if tinue turning to return to the starting point. Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used or if driving style has been changed. second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, " ----" appears on the display. Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average. 2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected

1 Diesel cars only. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 148 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

function. If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously.

148 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 149 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Compass*

Operation should be calibrated if the car is moved across 4. Hold the button on the underside of the several magnetic zones. rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the cur- 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from rent magnetic zone is shown. steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 5. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone ( 1–15) is shown. 2. Start the car. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. NOTE 6. Wait until the display resumes showing the For optimum calibration - switch off all elec- character C. trical equipment (climate control system, 04 wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are 7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no G031611 closed. more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- Rearview mirror with compass. tion is shown in the display, indicating that The upper right-hand corner of the rearview 3. Hold the button on the underside of the calibration is complete. Then drive a further mirror has an integrated display that shows the rearview mirror depressed 2 circles to fine-tune calibration. compass direction in which the front of the car approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. is pointing. Eight different directions are shown example) until the character C is shown. with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in ignition position IIsee page 70. To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the underside of the mirror using a paper clip for example. Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. G030295 The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered. The compass Magnetic zones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 150 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

General information on DSTC engine is restarted, drive to an authorised Operation The stability and traction control system, DSTC Volvo workshop. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps Symbols in the combined instrument the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction. panel If the symbols and are displayed The system limits the driving and brake force at the same time, read the message on the of the wheels individually so that skidding can information display. be avoided. This increases manoeuvrability and as a result safety in the event of sudden If the symbol appears alone then it may movement. appear as follows: 04 Traction is improved by means of the system Flashing light means that the system is • G021409 distributing the driving force between the now being activated. wheels. The system primarily engages at low Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- speed on poor road surfaces. • 1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC tem check when the engine is started. menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the The activation of the system during braking • Constant glow after starting the engine or system function is unchanged. may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car while driving means system fault. may accelerate slower than expected when the DSTC spin control OFF means that sys- accelerator pedal is depressed. Reduced operation tem operation is reduced. System operation during skidding and accel- 2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC Messages in the information display eration can be reduced. Operation during skid- menu is changed. DSTC Temporarily OFF ding is delayed and so allows more skidding System temporarily reduced due to excessive which provides greater freedom for dynamic The system remains reduced until the engine is brake disc temperature. The function is reacti- driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is next started. vated automatically when the brakes have improved as traction is no longer limited. cooled. WARNING DSTC Service required The car's driving characteristics may dete- System disabled due to a fault. riorate if the function is reduced. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. If the message remains when the

150 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 151 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adapting driving characteristics

Active chassis (Four C)* Operation For a description of the menu system, see Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously page 116. This menu cannot be accessed Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the while the car is in motion. characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced. Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable and is recommended for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft 04 and the movement of the body is smooth and G031392 gentle. Chassis settings. Sport Use the buttons in the centre console to This setting means that the car is perceived as change setting. The setting in use when the being more sporty and is recommended for engine is switched off is activated next time the more active driving. Steering response is faster engine is started. than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order Speed related steering force* to reduce rolling during fast cornering. Steering force increases with the speed of the Advanced car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The This setting is only recommended on very even steering is firmer and more immediate on and smooth road surfaces. motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed. The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further Steering force can be set in three levels so that minimised. you can select the level that suits you in terms of road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to Car settings Steering force level in the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 152 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control*

Operation Cruise control is then activated with or Temporary deactivation after which the current speed is stored and is Press On to disengage cruise control tem- used as the set speed. The display text porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets (---) km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g. in the display, e.g. (100) km/h. 100 km/h., Automatic temporary deactivation NOTE Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously when the driving wheels spin or if the car's Cruise control cannot be engaged at speed falls below approx. ca 30 km/h. Cruise speeds below 30 km/h. control is also deactivated when the brakes are used, when the gear selector is moved to neu- 04 Adjusting the set speed tral position or if the accelerator pedal is G021411 In active mode the speed is adjusted with long depressed for a longer time (approx. 60 sec- Display and controls. or short presses on or . onds). Cruise control then changes over to standby mode and the set speed is saved. Standby mode A temporary increase in speed using the accel- Resume set speed erator, such as while overtaking, does not Resume set speed affect the cruise control setting. When the If cruise control has been deactivated tempo- Deactivating accelerator is released the car will return to the rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The set speed. Activate/set speed speed is then set to the previously set speed. Set speed (in brackets = standby mode) NOTE NOTE If one of the cruise control buttons is kept Activating and setting the speed A significant increase in speed may arise depressed for more than approx. one after the speed has been resumed with . In order to enable the activation of cruise con- minute then cruise control is disengaged. trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode The engine must then be switched off in with the CRUISE button . The symbol order to then reset cruise control. illuminates in the display and the text (---) km/ h shows that cruise control is in standby Deactivation mode. Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 153 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

General Function WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control – (ACC) is designed to Adaptive cruise control is not a collision assist the driver with support on long straight avoidance system. The driver must inter- roads in steady traffic, for example on motor- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle ways and main roads. in front. Adaptive cruise control does not brake for WARNING people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow You must always pay attention to the traffic or stationary vehicles and objects. conditions and intervene when adaptive Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for cruise control is not maintaining a suitable example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at speed or suitable distance. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of 04 water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all G031393 driving situations and traffic, weather and snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or road conditions. Functions overview. on slip roads. The Function section and after informs Warning lamp, braking by driver required The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured about limitations that the driver must be Controls aware of before using the adaptive cruise by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by control. Radar sensor acceleration and braking. It is normal for the When driving you are responsible for main- brakes to emit a low sound when they are being Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise taining the correct distance and speed, used by cruise control. even when adaptive cruise control is used. control system and a coordinated spacing system. WARNING IMPORTANT The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under Maintenance of adaptive cruise control the brake pedal as it could become trapped. components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. The cruise control objective is to follow the vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set time interval. If the radar sensor has not detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 154 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the NOTE Set time interval speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise control set speed. The warning lamp may be difficult to notice Activating and setting the speed in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are The adaptive cruise control aims to control the being worn. Set speed (in brackets = standby mode) speed in a smooth way. In situations that Set time interval during adjustment demand sudden braking you must brake yourself. This applies with large differences in WARNING Set time interval after adjustment speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Cruise control only warns of vehicles Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking detected by the radar sensor. Consequently Activating and setting the speed may come unexpectedly or not at all, see there may be no warning or it may be sub- In order to enable the activation of cruise con- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but 04 page 156. trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode brake when it is necessary. Adaptive cruise control can only be activated with the button . The symbol illuminates above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or in the display and the characters (---) show if engine speed becomes too slow, then the Operation that cruise control is in standby mode. adaptive cruise control disengages and stops Cruise control is then activated with or , braking. In which case the driver must imme- after which the current speed is stored and is diately take over and maintain the distance to used as the set speed. The display characters vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is (---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100. 200 km/h. The car symbol is illuminated Warning lamp, braking by driver required on the left-hand side of the Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity display when the radar sensor that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the has detected another vehicle. car's braking capacity. The distance to vehicles in If the car needs to brake more heavily than front is only regulated when

cruise control capacity and the driver does not G017350 the symbol is illuminated. brake, then the cruise control uses the collision Display and controls. warning system's warning lamp and warning Activate and resume settings, increase NOTE sound to alert the driver that immediate inter- speed Cruise control cannot be engaged at vention is required. Standby mode, on/off speeds below 30 km/h.

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 155 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Adjusting the set speed At low speed, when the distances are short, the Deactivating and resuming settings In active mode the speed is adjusted with long adaptive cruise control increases the time Cruise control is deactivated, either with a or short presses on , or . In active interval slightly. short press on , or by means of driver inter- mode the button has the same function as The adaptive cruise control allows the time vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then but results in a lower increase in speed. interval to vary noticeably in certain situations shown in brackets, e.g. ( 100). Speed and time in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in interval are resumed with one press on . front smoothly and comfortably. NOTE For each additional press on , when cruise If any cruise control button is held Note that a short time interval only allows the control is activated, the set speed increases in depressed for more than approx. one driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen stages of 1 km/h. minute, cruise control is disengaged. The traffic problem should arise. 04 engine must be switched off in order to reset The number of lines for the NOTE cruise control. selected time interval is A significant increase in speed may arise In certain situations, cruise control cannot shown during the setting itself after the speed has been resumed with . be activated. Cruise control Unavailable and for several seconds after- is then shown in the display; see wards. Then a smaller scale page 157. version of the symbol is A short press on in standby mode or a long shown to the right of the dis- press in active mode deactivates cruise con- Set time interval play. The same symbol is also shown when trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be The set time interval to vehicles in front is Distance Alert is activated, see page 159. resumed. increased with and decreased with . NOTE Deactivation due to driver intervention Five different time intervals Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes can be chosen from and Only use the time interval that is allowed in are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral shown in the display as 1–5 accordance with local traffic regulations. position, or if the accelerator pedal is horizontal lines – the more If cruise control does not seem to react to depressed for a longer period. Cruise control lines there are the longer the activation the reason may be that the time then changes over to standby mode and the time interval, see page 159 interval to the closest vehicle prevents an driver must regulate vehicle speed manually. for table. increase in speed. If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a The higher the speed, the longer the calculated distance in metres for a specific time shorter period, for example during overtaking, interval. cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 156 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is Modification of the radar sensor could result in released. it being illegal to use.

Automatic deactivation WARNING Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems e.g. stability and traction control sys- Accessories or other objects such as auxil- tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work- iary lamps must not be installed in front of ing then cruise control is automatically deacti- the grille. vated. The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi- In the event of automatic deactivation a signal cles in front is reduced significantly: 04 will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver • if the radar sensor becomes blocked and must then intervene and adapt the speed to cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy vehicles in front. rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor. An automatic deactivation can be due to: • speed falls below 30 km/h NOTE • wheels lose traction Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor • brake temperature is high clean. G021414 • engine speed is too low if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet • Radar sensor field of vision (grey). • cantly different from your own speed. snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In vehicles at close quarters, for example a some situations it may detect another vehicle The radar sensor and its limitations vehicle that drives in between your car and later than expected or not detect any vehicle at vehicles in front. Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the all. radar sensor is also used by the Collision Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or Warning with Auto Brake function (see vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane page 167) and the Distance Alert function (see can remain undetected. page 159). It is designed to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 157 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

In bends the radar sensor may detect the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked with Auto Brake functions are not operating wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle and that vehicles in front of the car could not either. from view. be detected. The table presents possible causes for a mes- Fault tracing and action In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise sage being shown along with the appropriate If the display shows the message Radar Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning action. blocked See manual this means that the

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow. 04 Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals. road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Set time interval, during adjustment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 158 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Symbol Message Specification Set time interval, after adjustment.

Turn on DSTC Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been activated. to enable Cruise

Cruise control The cruise control has been shut down. Cancelled The driver must regulate the speed.

04 Cruise control Cruise control cannot be activated. Unavailable This could be due to: • brake temperature is high • the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain. Radar blocked Cruise control temporarily disengaged. See manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 156.

Cruise control Cruise control not working. Service required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 159 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

General Distance Alert is active at speeds above Five different time intervals Distance Alert is a function that indicates the 30 km/h. can be chosen from and time interval to vehicles in front. shown in the display as 1–5 WARNING horizontal lines – the more The distance information is only provided for lines there are the longer the vehicles driving in front of the car and in the Distance Alert only shows the distance to time interval. same direction. No distance information is pro- vehicles in front – the speed of the car is not vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- affected. cles. Number of lines Time interval (seconds) Operation 1 1.0 04 2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2

5 2.6

The number of lines for the G031394 selected time interval is G031396 shown during the setting itself A small section of the red warning lamp in the and for several seconds after- windscreen illuminates with a constant glow Press the button in the centre console to switch wards. Then a smaller scale when driving closer than the set time interval to the function on or off. The function is switched version of the symbol is vehicles in front. on if one lamp is illuminated in the button. shown to the right of the display. The same symbol is also shown when NOTE Set time interval adaptive cruise control is activated. The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi- Distance Alert is deactivated during the time cles in front are located to the left in the steer- that Adaptive Cruise Control is active. ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using and decreased using .

159 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 160 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

NOTE ing system. For more information on the radar that set due to limitations in sensor range; see sensor and its limitations, see page 156. page 156. The higher the speed, the longer the distance in metres for a given time interval. NOTE The set time interval is also used by the Adaptive Cruise Control function; see Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- page 153. tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning Only use time intervals permitted by local light in the windscreen cannot be seen. traffic regulations.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the 04 Limitations radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in The function uses the same radar sensor as front. The size of other vehicles could also adaptive cruise control and the collision warn- affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent. Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

160 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 161 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

Symbol Message Specification Radar blocked. Distance Alert temporarily disengaged. See manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 156

Collision warn. Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged. Service required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains. 04

161 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 162 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

General IMPORTANT Function City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver Maintenance and replacement of City to avoid a collision when driving in queues, Safety™ components may only be per- amongst other things, when changes in the formed by an authorised Volvo workshop. traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident. WARNING The function is active at speeds up to 30 km/h and assists the driver by braking the car auto- City Safety™ does not engage in all driving matically. situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. City Safety™ is activated in situations where 04 City Safety™ does not react to vehicles the driver should have started braking earlier, driving in a different direction from the car, which is why is cannot help the driver in every to small vehicles such as bicycles and situation. motorcycles or to humans and animals. Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window. City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse City Safety™ can prevent collision at a City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the for the driver to change his/her driving style. If speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do higher speed difference, it is only possible the windscreen. If there is an immediate risk of to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain the braking, there will be a collision sooner or collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake full brake function, the driver must depress later. the brake pedal. the car with approx. 50% of maximum brake force. The driver or passengers normally only notice Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car driver always bears responsibility for main- If the speed difference is 15 km/h or less in is extremely close to being in a collision. taining the proper distance and speed. relation to the vehicle in front then City If the car is also equipped with a Collision Safety™ can completely prevent a collision. Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two If the difference is 15-30 km/h, City Safety™ systems complement each other. For more may not prevent the collision on its own. To information on Collision Warning function with obtain full brake force, the driver must depress Auto Brake, see page 167. the brake pedal. This could make it possible to prevent a collision even at speed differences above 15 km/h.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 163 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

When the function is activated and brakes, the WARNING instrument panel display shows a message to the effect that the function is/has been active. The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety™ is disabled manually. NOTE To enable City Safety™ again: The brake lights come on when City Safety™ brakes the car. • Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option with the RESET button. Operation or

G021409 04 NOTE • Switch off the engine and take out the Display and direction indicator stalk. remote control key to position I, then re- The City Safety™ function is always ena- Thumbwheel insert it to position II and start the engine - bled after the engine has been started via by which means City Safety™ is re- key position I and II (see page 70 on key RESET button enabled (see page 70 on key positions). positions). With the engine running City Safety™ can be disabled as follows: Limitations On and Off City Safety™ sensor is designed to detect In certain situations, it may advisable to disable 1. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to City cars and other large vehicles in front of the car City Safety™, e.g. for driving off-road where Safety on the display. irrespective of whether it is day or night. leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet/ 2. Hold the RESET button depressed for 1 windscreen or similar. second to switch to Off. However, the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality in e.g. heavy snowfall or However, the function will be enabled the next rain, dense fog, dust storms or snow flurries. time the engine is started, regardless of Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may whether the system was enabled or disabled disrupt the function. when the engine was switched off. Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.

163 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 164 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

Vehicles with low reflectivity may disrupt the Cause Action IMPORTANT function of the sensor. The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the NOTE face in front of the screen surface in laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a laser sensor is dirty front of the sensor Keep the windscreen surface in front of surface of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (or larger), • or covered with ice from dirt, ice and the laser sensor free from ice, snow and then an authorised Volvo workshop must be or snow. snow. contacted for repair or replacement of the dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- windscreen (see the illustration for sensor tion, page 162). The laser sensor Remove the block- location, page 162). Failure to take action • Do not affix or mount anything on the field of vision is ing object. may result in reduced performance for City windscreen in front of the laser sensor blocked. Safety™. 04 • Remove ice and snow from the bonnet To avoid the risk of reducing City - snow and ice must not exceed a height Safety™ performance the following also of 5 cm. applies: • The same type or a Volvo-approved Fault tracing and action windscreen must be fitted during If the message Windscreen Sensors replacement blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis- • The same type or Volvo-approved play, it indicates that the laser sensor is windscreen wipers must be fitted during blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of replacement. the car. This means that City Safety™ is not operational. Laser sensor The Windscreen Sensors blocked message The City Safety™ function includes a sensor is not shown for all situations in which the laser which transmits laser light. It is absolutely sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be essential to follow the prescribed instructions diligent about keeping the windscreen and when handling the laser sensor. area in front of the laser sensor clean. The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with sug- gestions for appropriate action.

164 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 165 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

WARNING For more information on the laser sensor, see A text message can be acknowledged by page 8. briefly pressing the READ button on the direc- Never look into the laser sensor (which tion indicator stalk. emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni- Symbols and messages in the display fying optics such as a magnifying glass, In conjunction with automatic braking by the microscope, lens or similar optical instru- City Safety™ system, one or more symbols ments - this would involve a risk of eye injury may illuminate on the instrument panel and a (the illustration on page 162 shows sensor location). message may appear on its display.

04 Symbol Message Meaning/Action Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it. blocked • Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor. Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 163.

City Safety Service City Safety™ is not operational. required • Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

165 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 166 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

City Safety ON/OFF City Safety™ can be manually disabled/enabled, whereby OFF or ON is selected, see section "On/ Off".

City Safety Unavailable If the text Unavailable is shown instead of Off or On, City Safety™ is switched off due to a technical fault. City Safety Service required is shown in the instrument panel display prior to this.

166 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 167 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

General WARNING Function Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed The collision warning system does not work to assist the driver when there is a risk of col- in all driving situations and traffic, weather liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or and road conditions. The collision warning driving in the same direction. system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and The collision warning system has the following animals. three functions. Warning only activated in the event of a high • Collision warning warns the driver of a risk for collision. The Function section and potentially imminent collision. the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before • Brake support assists the driver to brake 04 effectively in a critical situation. using Collision Warning with Auto Brake. G032740 • Auto Brake brakes the car automatically The Auto Brake function can only reduce the when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto collision speed. The driver must depress the Functions overview. brake pedal to achieve full brake function. Brake function cannot prevent a collision Visual warning signal in the event of a col- but instead aims to reduce collision speed. Never wait for a collision warning. When lision risk driving you are responsible for maintaining Radar sensor IMPORTANT the correct distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is used. Camera sensor Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Collision warning Together with a camera sensor, the radar sensor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car. In the event of there being a risk of collision with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning lamp and a warning sound. The collision warning system is active from and including 7 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 168 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

Brake support On and Off uations, then change to warning distance If the risk of collision still increases after the To select whether the collision warning system Normal. collision warning then the brake support is acti- should be switched on or off: Under the Car Only use warning distance Short in excep- vated. The brake support prepares the brake settings Collision warning settings menu, tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving. system for rapid braking and the brakes are select between the options for On or Off. The applied gently, which may be noticed as a setting selected when the engine was switched NOTE slight jerk. off is automatically obtained when the engine When the adaptive cruise control is in use If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently is started. the warning lamp and warning sound will be quickly then full brake function is implemented, Activating/deactivating warning signals used by the cruise control even if the colli- even with light pedal force. The warning sound and warning lamp are acti- sion warning system is switched off. 04 Auto Brake vated automatically when the engine is started The collision warning system warns the If the driver has not yet started an evasive if the system is switched on. driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a The warning sound can be activated/deacti- time. collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func- vated separately using the options for On or In order for the collision warning system to tion comes into effect, without the driver need- Off under Car settings Collision warning ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then be effective, always drive with the Distance settings Warning sound. Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see takes place with limited brake force in order to page 159. reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake Set warning distance in order to achieve full brake force. The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are NOTE Operation deployed. Select one of the options from Even if the warning distance has been set to Settings are made from the centre console dis- Long, Normal or Short under Car settings Long then in certain situations warnings play via a menu system. For information on Collision warning settings Warning could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- how the menu system is used, see page 116. distance. cles in front brake heavily. The warning distance determines the system's NOTE sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an Checking settings The Auto Brake function is always switched earlier warning. First test with Long and if this The settings required can be controlled on the on and cannot be switched off. setting produces too many warnings, which centre console display. Access via the menu could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 169 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake* for Car settings Collision warning WARNING Driver Alert Control, see page 173 and Lane settings, see page 116. Departure Warning, see page 176. Warnings and braking action could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic Limitations situation or external influences mean that NOTE the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a The visual warning signal may be difficult to Keep the windscreen surface in front of the vehicle in front correctly. notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec- camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt. tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the The sensor system has a limited range for driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- stationary or slow vehicles so the system Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- provides less effective warnings or no warning sound should therefore always be acti- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above could reduce or prevent the function of one vated. 70 km/h) for such vehicles. or more camera-dependent systems. 04 Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles NOTE could be disengaged due to darkness. The camera sensors have limitations similar to The visual warning signal can be temporarily the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark- disengaged in the event of high passenger The collision warning system uses the same ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For example. Under such conditions the functions then the warning sound is activated even if more information on the radar sensor and its of camera-dependent systems could be sig- it is deactivated in the menu system. limitations, see page 156. nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. • Warnings may not appear if the dis- An absent or late warning could mean that Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if there is no brake support or it comes late. riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty steering wheel and pedal movements road surfaces or unclear lane markings could If warnings are perceived as being too frequent are large, e.g. a very active driving style. also significantly reduce a camera sensor func- or disturbing then the warning distance can be tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage- reduced. This would lead to the system warn- way and detecting other vehicles for example. ing at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings. During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes Camera sensor limitations after the engine is started in order to protect The car's camera sensor is used by the three camera functionality. functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 170 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

Fault tracing and action Cause Action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the The windscreen sur- Wait. It may take camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect face in front of the several minutes for vehicles or road markings in front of the car. camera has been the camera to meas- cleaned but the ure the visibility. In turn this means that the Collision Warning message remains. with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Control functions are not operating Dirt has appeared Contact an author- with full functionality. between the inside ised Volvo work- The table presents possible causes for a mes- of the windscreen shop to have the 04 sage being shown along with the appropriate and the camera. windscreen inside action. the camera cover cleaned.

Cause Action Low-hanging Find another way to objects, e.g. flag for signal the load or The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- projecting load. accept reduced face in front of the screen surface in functionality. camera is dirty or front of the camera covered with ice or from dirt, ice and snow. snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain No action. At times or snow means that the camera does not the camera does not work during heavy work sufficiently rain or snowfall. well.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 171 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off. Shown when the engine is started. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated. Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button. 04

Auto braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active. vated

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 172 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

Symbol Message Specification Radar blocked. See man- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged. ual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 156

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains. 04

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 173 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

Introduction General information on Driver Alert The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete- The Driver Alert System is intended to assist Control - DAC riorating driving ability and it is primarily drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or intended for major roads. The function is not who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are intended for city traffic. driving on. In some cases driving ability is not affected The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- despite driver fatigue. In which case there may ent functions, which can either be switched on not be any warning issued for the driver. For at the same time or individually: this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver • Driver Alert Control (DAC) fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC • Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see issues a warning, see page 174. 04 page 176. A switched-on function is set in standby mode NOTE G017332 and is not activated automatically until speed The function must not be used to extend a exceeds 65 km/h. The function is intended to attract the driver's driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular The function is deactivated again when speed attention when he/she starts to drive less con- intervals and ensure that you are fully decreases to below 60 km/h. sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or rested. starts to fall asleep. Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted A camera detects the side markings painted on Limitation on each side. the carriageway and compares the section of In some cases the system may issue a warning the road with the driver's steering wheel move- despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example: WARNING ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly. • if the driver tests the LDW function. The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be • in strong side winds. NOTE of supplementary assistance. • on rutted road surfaces. The driver always has ultimate responsibility The camera sensor has certain limitations; that the car is driven safely. see page 169.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 174 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

Operation Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the Some settings are made from the centre con- the display shows Driver Alert. The sec- driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as sole display and its menu system. For informa- ond row displays the Off, Unavailable or the text message Driver Alert Time for a tion on how the menu system is used, see Level mark options. break. The warning is repeated after a time if page 116. READ button. Confirms or clears a warning driving ability does not improve. The current status can be checked on the trip in the memory. WARNING computer display with the left-hand stalk Activating Driver Alert Control switch. An alarm should be taken most seriously as Using the centre console display with its menu a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/ system, locate Car settings Driver Alert. her condition. 04 Select the On option. In the event of an alarm or signs of driver The function is activated when speed fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as exceeds 65 km/h and it remains soon as possible and rest. active as long as the speed exceeds Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- 60 km/h. The display shows a level gerous to drive when tired as it is under the mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars influence of alcohol. indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving. G017329

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 175 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style. The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. 04 blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 176 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

General information on Lane Departure Operation and function If the camera can no longer detect the carria- Warning - LDW geway's side markings or if speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable. If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal. No warning is given in the following situations:

04 • Direction indicators activated

G032014 • The driver has his/her foot on the brake pedal 1 G032699 The function is switched on or off by means of • In the event of the accelerator pedal being The function is intended to reduce the risk for a switch on the centre console. An indicator depressed rapidly1 single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in lamp in the button illuminates when the func- • In the event of rapid steering wheel move- certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car- tion is switched on. ments1 riageway and is in danger of driving either into The trip computer display shows Lane Depart In the event of a sudden turn so that the car a ditch or into oncoming traffic. • Warn Unavailable when the function is in rolls. LDW consists of a camera that detects the side standby mode. The camera sensor also has certain limitations. markings painted on the carriageway. The The LDW function is activated automatically For more information, see page 169. driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the from standby mode after the camera has scan- vehicle crosses a side marking. ned in the carriageway's side markings and NOTE speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer The driver is only warned once each time the display then shows Lane Depart Warn wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic Available. alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see Personal preferences.

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 177 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Lane departure warning The function is switched on/off. On/Off Shown at switch-on/off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Availa- The function scans the carriageway's side markings. ble

Lane Depart Warn Unavail- Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor 04 able is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains. required

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 178 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

Personal preferences Using the centre console display with its menu system, locate Car settings Lane departure warning. Select the option required, see page 116. On at start up: This option sets the function in standby mode each time the car is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.

04 Increased sensitivity: This option increases sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 179 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

General1 Function 1 Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the Active top centre console display indicate the distance to the detected obstacle. 2 Parking assistance is available in two variants: • Rear only Active Both front and rear. • 3

WARNING Active 04 Parking assistance does not relinquish the G031399 Display screens in different situations. driver's own responsibility during parking. Display in car with only rear sensors. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- The system is automatically engaged when the Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is sors. dren and animals near the car. illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out. Display in car with both front and rear sensors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm The centre console display shows an overview or closer to a detected obstacle. of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle. Display in car with both front and rear sensors. No obstacle detected in the front or Marked fields show which of the four sensors rear. detected an obstacle. The more marked fields When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is in the same bar, the shorter the distance constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully between the car and detected obstacle. filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the is within the distance for the constant tone both shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of behind and in front of the car, then the tone or behind the car. Other sound from the audio sounds alternately from the loudspeakers. system is muted automatically.

1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 180 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance IMPORTANT When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors – the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.

Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa- 04 tion display shows Park assist syst Service

G031400 G031401 required then parking assistance is disengaged. The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered to the front of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for IMPORTANT obstacles behind comes from the rear loud- obstacles in front comes from the front loud- In certain conditions the parking assistance speakers. speaker. system may produce incorrect warning sig- Rear parking assistance is activated when Front parking assistance is active at speeds up nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- reverse gear is engaged. to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys- quencies that the system works with. tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However, The system must be deactivated when revers- the lamp in the button remains illuminated in Examples of such sources include horns, ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar order to indicate that the system is activated wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and or similar. Otherwise they would trigger the exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. for the next time the driver shall park. When the sensors. speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated. NOTE Rear parking assistance is deactivated NOTE automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 181 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

Cleaning the sensors NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

04 G031402

Sensor location, front. G031403

Sensor location, rear. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 182 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Parking camera*

General information on PAC Function NOTE The PAC (Park Assist Camera) displays what is Objects on the screen may appear further behind the car when reversing with the help of away than they actually are. a display screen. Using references lines in the display screen, Light conditions the system also indicates where the car will end The parking camera automatically detects light up based on steering wheel movement. This conditions and continually adjusts sensitivity. makes it easier to parallel park, reverse into Because of this, the image may vary slightly in tight spaces or connect a trailer. brightness and quality. In poor light conditions PAC can also be installed on cars equipped or darkness, the camera compensates by 04 with Volvo genuine GPS navigator RTI* - Road increasing light sensitivity, which could reduce and Traffic Information System. G031930 image quality. If the display screen seems too dark, bright- The driver sees what is behind the car and if WARNING ness can be increased with the thumbwheel (1) something appears from the sides. • The parking camera serves as an aid. It for instrument lighting; see page 77. does not relieve the driver of responsi- The parking camera is mounted at the opening bility when reversing. handle of the tailgate. NOTE • The camera has blind spots, where The camera's strong wide-angle lens shows a In poor light conditions, it is extremely obstacles cannot be detected. wide area behind the car as well as the car's important that the camera lens is free of dirt, bumper and towbar. • Be aware of people and animals in the snow and ice. vicinity of the car. The system's electronic image processing cor- rects the "fisheye" effect of the camera image to display a natural image. As a result, objects on the screen may appear to be tilted. This is perfectly normal.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 183 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Parking camera*

Operation Guide lines Side lines Activation The parking camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged, if the function is selected in the menu system, see page 116. If RTI is active, the PAC system automatically takes over and the camera image appears on the display screen instead of navigation system information. Deactivation 04 The parking camera works with a delay. This G000000 G031929 means that the image behind the car may be shown even if reverse gear has been disen- The lines on the screen are projected as if they The side lines indicate the path the car will take gaged in order to drive the car forward a little. were at ground level behind the car and are during reversing. They indicate approx. 10 cm directly related to steering wheel movement, of "free space" between the inside of the line After reversing is complete, the camera image which shows the driver the path the car will and the outer tip of the door mirrors - even remains for approx. 15 seconds or until speed take, even when turning. when turning. exceeds 10 km/h. • The side lines extend 2.0 m back from the The system then resumes whatever mode was NOTE bumper. active prior to reverse gear engagement - e.g. When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the Transverse lines the RTI system is reactivated. screen show the path of the car - not the The short transverse lines show the distance trailer. from the bumper and back. • The RED transverse line indicates 0.3 m IMPORTANT • The YELLOW transverse line indicates Bear in mind that the screen only shows the 1.5 m. area behind the car - pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 184 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Parking camera*

Cars equipped with Park Assist If one of the outer Part Assist Limitations sensors detects an object closer than 0.4 m,but outside NOTE of the parking camera's field of vision, a door mirror icon is A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the shown on the screen. camera's view. If this is the case, check the door mirrors for any obstacles. Even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively Settings large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- 04 To set system activation, press MENU and go cles could thereby go undetected until they are

G031931 to Main menu Car settings . Select from very close to the car. the following options: To bear in mind If the car is also equipped with Park Assist* rear Parking camera settings (see page 179), coloured markings indicate the • Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice • Select Park Assist lines to show side lines and snow. distance to the obstacle, e.g. when reversing when reversing. into a parking spot. • Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- • Select Distance Bars to show distance warm water and car shampoo - take care lines when reversing1. Marking (colour) Distance to not to scratch the lens. obstacle (m) System activation • Select Automatic for PAC to be active Green 0,8-1,5 during reversing. Select Off for PAC to be permanently off. Yellow 0,3-0,8 •

Red 0–0,3

1 Only if Park Assist is installed.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 185 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

General information on BLIS WARNING Blind spots The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways. 04

G031404 When a camera has detected a vehicle G017834 inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp BLIS camera A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m illuminates with a constant glow. Indicator lamp Activating/deactivating BLIS symbol NOTE The lamp illuminates on the side of the car BLIS is an information system based on cam- where the system has detected the vehicle. era technology that under certain conditions If the car is overtaken on both sides at the can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in same time then both lamps illuminate. BLIS the same direction as the host vehicle in the so- called "blind spot". BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- IMPORTANT tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS Repair of the BLIS system components indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown must only be performed by an authorised on the information display. In such cases, Volvo workshop. check and clean the lenses. G031406 If necessary, the system can be switched off Button for activating/deactivating. temporarily by pressing the BLIS button once, see page 185. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 186 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

BLIS is activated when the engine is started. WARNING WARNING Upon activation, the indicator lamps in the door panels flash 3 times. BLIS does not work in sharp bends. The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders. The system can be deactivated/activated BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. The BLIS cameras may have problems in when the engine is started by pressing the conditions with intense light or when driving A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal BLIS button. in the dark with no light sources (e.g. road- other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- way lighting or other vehicles). The system When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but- vent the vehicle in the screened area from may interpret the lack of lights as a blocked ton goes out and a text message is shown in being detected by BLIS. camera or cameras. the instrument panel display. In either case, a message appears on the 04 When BLIS is activated the light in the button Daylight and darkness information display. illuminates, a new text message is shown and In daylight the system reacts to the shape of When driving in such conditions, system the indicator lamps in the door panels flash the surrounding vehicles. The system is performance may be temporarily poorer and 3 times. Press the READ button to clear the designed to detect motor vehicles such as a text message is shown; see page 187. If text message. For more information on mes- cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles. the message disappears automatically, it sages, see page 118. In darkness the system reacts to the head- indicates that BLIS has resumed normal function. lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head- When BLIS operates lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to The system operates when the car is driven at on then the system does not detect the vehi- those of the human eye, i.e. they do not cles. This means for example that the system "see" as well in e.g. heavy snowfall or thick a speed above 10 km/h. fog. does not react to a trailer without headlamps Overtaking which is towed behind a car or truck. The system is designed to react if: • you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle • you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 187 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Cleaning Message Specification Here are several examples of situations where In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Reduced function disrupted by fog or Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not strong sunlight shin- scratched. ing directly into the camera. IMPORTANT The camera resets The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice itself when the envi- or snow. If necessary, brush snow away ronment has from the lenses. returned to normal. 04

Blind-spot info BLIS system off Reflection from shiny wet road surface. Messages on the display system OFF Message Specification Limitations Blind-spot info BLIS system on In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may system ON illuminate despite there being no other vehicle Blind spot syst. BLIS not function- within the blind spot. Service required ing. NOTE Contact an authorised Volvo work- If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. shop. lated occasions despite there being no noise barrier or concrete road surface. other vehicle within the blind spot then this Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is does not mean that a fault has arisen in the Camera blocked blocked by dirt, system. snow or ice. Clean In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the the lenses. display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 188 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera. 04

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 189 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage spaces

04 G031433

189 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 190 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage compartment in door panel Tunnel console out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils. Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions Glovebox Ticket clip Glovebox Storage compartment, cup holder Coat hanger

04 Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat Storage pocket

Coat hanger Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest. The jacket holder is only designed for light G024206 clothing. Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are The owner's manual and maps can be kept specified then there is a cigarette lighter in here for example. There are also holders for the 12 V socket for the front seat, see pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can page 191, and a detachable ashtray in the be locked with the key blade, see page 42. cup holder.) Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal Floor mats* objects in the cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 56. Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor mats. Cigarette lighter and ashtray* The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up. Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 191 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

WARNING 12 V socket the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see The floor mat at the driver's seat must be page 70. firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals. WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use. Vanity mirror Electrical socket in cargo area*

04 G031435

12 V socket, front seat. G021438

Vanity mirror with lighting. G031436 The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's side* and passenger side respectively, is Fold down the cover to access the electrical switched on automatically when the cover is socket. It works irrespective of whether or not raised. the ignition is switched on. G021440

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat. NOTE The electrical socket can be used for 12 V Do not use the electric socket with the accessories, such as mobile phone chargers engine switched off as there is a risk of the and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For battery becoming discharged.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 192 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

General NOTE tion. Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad. Only a selection of mobile phones is fully compatible with the handsfree function. ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but- Information on compatible phones is avail- ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same able at Volvo dealers and at functionality available in steering wheel www.volvocars.com. keypad.

Phone functions, controls overview Remember The menus are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- 04 eral information on menus, see page 116. G021443 Activating/deactivating System overview. A short press on PHONE activates the hands- Mobile phone free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The Microphone symbol shows that the handsfree func- Steering wheel keypad tion is active. Centre console One long press on PHONE deactivates the G031456 handsfree function and disconnects a con- BluetoothTM Centre console control panel. nected phone. A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM VOLUME – Same functionality available in Connect mobile phone can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- steering wheel keypad. A mobile phone is connected in different ways tem. The audio system then works handsfree, Number and letter buttons depending on whether or not it has been con- with the option to control a range of the mobile nected previously. To connect a mobile phone phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone PHONE - On/off and standby mode for the first time, follow the instructions below: can be operated by its own keys irrespective of Navigation button whether or not it is connected. EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear entered characters, interrupt current func-

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 193 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system To call 1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible 1. Activate the handsfree function with 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual PHONE. If there is a phone connected, at the top of the display and that the or www.volvocars.com. disconnect the connected phone. symbol is visible. 2. Activate the handsfree function with 2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see 2. Dial the number or use the phone book, PHONE. the mobile phone manual. see page 195. > Menu option Add phone appears on 3. Select My Car in the list of units detected 3. Press ENTER. the display. If one or more mobile in your mobile phone. The call is interrupted with EXIT. phones have already been registered 4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile then these are also shown. Disconnecting the mobile phone phone when prompted for the PIN code. 04 3. Select Add phone. Automatic disconnection takes place if the 5. Select to connect to My Car from the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's > The audio system searches for mobile mobile phone. range. For more information on connection, phones in the vicinity. The search takes see page 195. approximately 30 seconds. The mobile The mobile phone is registered and connected phones detected are specified with their automatically to the audio system while the text Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- respective BluetoothTM name in the dis- Synchronising is shown in the display. For vating the handsfree function with one long play. The handsfree function's more information on how mobile phones are press on PHONE. The handsfree function is BluetoothTM name is shown in the registered, see page 195. also deactivated when the engine is switched 1 mobile phone such as My Car. When the connection is established the symbol off or when a door is opened . 4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the is shown and the mobile phone When the mobile phone has been discon- audio system display. BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone can be controlled from the the mobile phone's built-in microphone and 5. Enter the number series shown in the audio audio system. speaker. system display via the mobile phone keypad.

1 Only Keyless Drive ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 194 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

NOTE NOTE The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone settings Some mobile phones require that the With certain mobile phones the connection changeover from handsfree is confirmed is terminated when the privacy function is Sounds and volume Mute radio. from the phone's keypad. used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect. Ring volume Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume Making and receiving calls • Phone book – searching in the phone Ring volume and adjust with / on the navigation button. Incoming call book. Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the Ring signals audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. NOTE 04 The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- Refuse or end with EXIT. A new call cannot be started during an nals that can be selected under Phone ongoing call. Automatic answer settings Sounds and volume Ring The automatic answer function means that signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc. calls are accepted automatically. Audio settings NOTE ± Activate/deactivate under Phone settings Phone call volume Call options Automatic answer. The call volume can be regulated when the The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the In call menu system's integrated signals is used. steering wheel keypad or VOLUME. Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions: Audio system volume In order to select the connected phone's ring 2 • Mute microphone - audio system micro- Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, signal , go to Phone settings Sounds and phone is muted. the audio system volume is controlled as usual volume Ring signals Use mobile with VOLUME. In order to control audio system Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- phone signal. • volume during an ongoing call you have to ferred to the mobile phone. switch to one of the audio sources.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 195 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

More on registering and connecting Phone book The phone book can also be reached with / A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg- All use of the phone book presupposes that the on the navigation button or with / on istered. Registration is performed once per text PHONE is shown at the top of the display the steering wheel keypad. The search can also phone. After registration the phone no longer and that the symbol is visible. be performed from the phone book's Search needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of menu under Phone book Search: one mobile phone can be connected at a time. The audio system stores a copy of the phone Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth book from each registered mobile phone. The 1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and phone book is copied automatically to the Remove phone. press ENTER, or simply press ENTER. audio system during each connection. 2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to Automatic connection ± Deactivate the function under Phone call. When the handsfree function is active and the settings Synchronise phone book. 04 last mobile phone connected is in range it is Searching for contacts is only performed in Voice recognition connected automatically. When the audio sys- the connected mobile phone's phone The mobile phone's voice recognition function tem searches for the last phone connected its book. for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER. name is shown in the display. To change over to manual connection of another phone, press Voice mail number NOTE EXIT. Voice mail number can be changed under If the mobile phone does not support copy- Phone settings Call options Voice mail Manual connection ing of the phone book then List is empty is number. If there is no number stored then this If you want to connect a mobile phone other shown when copying is finished. menu can be reached with one long press on than the last connected or change the con- 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored nected mobile phone, proceed as follows: If the phone book contains a ringing caller's number. 1. Set the audio system in phone mode. contact information then this is shown in the display. Call lists 2. Press PHONE and select one of the The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- phones in the list. Searching for contacts tion at each new connection and are then The connection can also be made via the menu The easiest way to search in the phone book is updated during the connection. Press ENTER system under Bluetooth Connect phone with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts to show the last dialled. Other call lists are a search in the phone book based on the key's available under Call register. or Change phone. first letter.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 196 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

NOTE Key Function Certain mobile phones show a list of the last P Q R S 7 ß dialled calls in reverse order.

T U V 8 Ü Ù Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre console. Press once for the key's first character, W X Y Z 9 twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the following table. Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after each other 04 A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. One long press on EXIT clears all input with the same key. characters. / on the navigation button + 0 @ * # & $ £ / % scrolls between the characters. Shift between upper and lower Key Function case letter Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç

D E F 3 È É

G H I 4 Ì

J K L 5

M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 197 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

General Remember Switch off the phone with one long press on PHONE. SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module). For installa- Making and receiving calls tion, see page 200. Emergency calls to emer- Making calls gency numbers can be made without a SIM 1. Switch on the phone. card. 2. 5 If PHONE is not shown in the display, NOTE briefly press PHONE. 3. Dial the number or use the phone book, The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM 04 cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. see page 192. G033204 Contact the network operator if the SIM 4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up card needs to be changed. System overview. the privacy handset. Release the handset Microphone by pulling it down. Menus and controls SIM card reader The menus are navigated using the control Ending a call End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up Keypad, see page 133. panel and the steering wheel keypad. For general information on menus, see the privacy handset. Control panel page 116. For information on the phone's con- Incoming call trols, see page 192. Privacy handset Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the On/Off privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off Safety Switch on the phone with a short press on the hook when the phone rings then calls must Only entrust phone servicing to an authorised PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The be received using ENTER. Volvo workshop. The built-in phone must be symbol shows that the phone is switched End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity on. When this symbol is shown calls can be the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT. of blasting work. IDIS limits the menu system received even if the CD menu for example is depending on the speed of the car, see shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to Automatic answer page 199. use the phone menus and to dial out. The text See page 194. PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 198 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

Call waiting another is on hold. The Join menu option starts Signals and volume The function enables a new call to be answered the conference call. Change the ring signal under Phone settings during an ongoing call. The new call is All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con- Sounds and volume Ring signals. answered as usual and the previous call is put ference call is terminated. on hold. Activate/deactivate the message beep under Switching between the privacy handset Phone settings Sounds and volume ± Activate/deactivate under Phone settings Message beep. Call options Call waiting. and handsfree Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset Control the ring volume under Phone settings Automatic diversions by picking up the privacy handset or selecting Sounds and volume Ring volume. Incoming calls can be diverted automatically Privacy handset in the menu. Adjust using / on the navigation button. 04 depending on the type of call and situation. Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree ± Activate/deactivate under Call options using the Handsfree menu option. Phone book Diversions. Mute mode Contact information can be stored on the SIM Mute mode involves deactivating the micro- card or in the phone. During a call phone, see page 197. Storing contacts in the phone book Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access ± Activate/deactivate the microphone using 1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book the In-call menu. the Microphone On/Off menu option. New contact. To call 2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor- 1. Put the call on hold under Hold. Audio settings mation on text input, see below. 2. Dial the number of the third party or use the Phone call volume 3. Enter a number and press ENTER. Phone book menu option. The phone uses the front door speakers. Call 4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and volume can be controlled when the text Switch between calls using the Swap menu press ENTER. option. PHONE is shown at the top of the display. ± Use the steering wheel keypad or Inputting text Conference call VOLUME. See page 196. A conference call consists of several parties. It can be initiated when a call is underway and Audio system volume Searching for contacts See page 135. See page 195.

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 199 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

Erasing contacts 3. The message text is shown in the display. Call duration Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting Additional selections can be made by Call duration is stored under Call register it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase pressing ENTER. Call duration. and press ENTER. Writing and sending messages ± Reset the values under Call register Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase 1. Scroll to Messages Write new and Call duration Reset timers. SIM or Erase phone. press ENTER. Show/hide number for third party 2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa- Copying entries between the SIM card The phone number can be temporarily hidden tion on text input, see page 196. and the phone book under Call options Send my number. Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to 3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER. phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER. IMEI number 04 4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER. In order to block a phone the network provider Voice mail number Message settings must be advised of the phone's IMEI number. See page 195. Message settings are not normally changed. ± Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis- The network provider has further information play. Write it down and keep it in a safe Other functions and settings on these settings. There are three options place. under Messages Message settings: IDIS Network selection IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System) • SMSC number - Specifies the message The network can be selected either automati- centre which will transfer the messages. can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse cally or manually under Phone settings ring signals from incoming calls. This way less • Validity time - Specifies how long the Network selection. attention is distracted from driving. message will be stored in the message ± IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings centre. SIM code and security IDIS. • Message type. The PIN code can protect the SIM card from unauthorised use. Call lists Reading messages The code can be changed under Phone 1. Scroll to Messages Read and press Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also settings Edit PIN code. ENTER. shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num- Change the security level under Phone 2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER. bers in the lists can be saved in the phone settings SIM security. book.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 200 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

Select maximum security with the On option. The code will then need to be entered each time the phone is switched on. Select the next highest security level with the Automatic option. The phone then stores the code and automatically specifies it when the phone is switched on. When the SIM card is used with another phone the code must be entered manually. Select minimum security with the Off option. 04 The SIM card can then be used without the G021451 code at all. Make sure that the phone is deactivated. Reset to factory settings Pull out the SIM card holder which is The phone settings are fully reset under Phone located in the glovebox. settings Reset phone settings. Place the SIM card with the metal surface visible and fit the cover on the SIM card Installing the SIM card holder . Refit the SIM card holder. G021450

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 201 evastarck

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

201 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 202 evastarck

Recommendations during driving...... 204 Refuelling...... 206 Fuel...... 207 Loading...... 210 Cargo area...... 211 Warning triangle...... 215 Driving with a trailer...... 216 Towing and recovery...... 222

202 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 203 evastarck

DURING YOUR JOURNEY 05 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 204 evastarck

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

General been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly • Maintain a low speed when driving with a and check that full brake function is achieved. trailer up long, steep ascents. Economical driving Water and mud for example can make the • Do not turn the engine off immediately you Economical driving and reducing environmen- brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake stop after a hard drive. tal impact result from driving gently with antic- function. ipation and adapting your driving style and NOTE speed to the current situation (for further Clean the electric contacts of the electric advice on how you can reduce environmental engine block heater and trailer coupling after It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to impact, see page 11). driving in water and mud. operate for a while after the engine has been switched off. • Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light Do not let the car stand with water over the sills loads as soon as it is possible. for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions. • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front • A cold engine consumes more fuel than a of the grille when driving in extreme high warm one. IMPORTANT temperatures. • Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the • Do not exceed engine speeds of car. Engine damage can occur if water enters 05 the air filter. 4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if • Do not use winter tyres when the roads are driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter- dry. In depths greater than 25 cm, water could rain. The oil temperature could become too enter the transmission. This reduces the high. • Remove the load carrier when it is not in lubricating ability of the oils and shortens use. the service life of the systems. Open tailgate • Use the parking heater* in cold weather so In the event of stalling in water, do not try to Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how- that the engine reaches its normal operat- restart - tow the car out of the water to an ever necessary, only drive for a short distance. ing temperature more quickly. authorised Volvo workshop. Risk of engine Close all windows, set the air distribution to the breakdown. Driving in water windscreen and floor and run the fan at the highest speed. The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of Engine and cooling system 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised Under special conditions, for example when WARNING driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with when passing through flowing water. Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and During driving in water, maintain a low speed exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- through the cargo area. and do not stop the car. When the water has lows to avoid overheating the engine:

204 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 205 evastarck

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

Do not overload the battery Winter driving To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- The electrical functions in the car load the bat- Check the following in particular before the ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition cold season: if there is a risk of snow or ice. II position when the engine is switched off. Use • The engine coolant must contain at least ignition position I instead, as less power is con- 50% glycol. This mixture protects the NOTE sumed. engine down to approximately –35 °C. To The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement Also, be aware of different accessories that achieve optimum antifreeze protection, in certain countries. Studded tyres are not load the electrical system. Do not use functions different types of glycol must not be mixed. permitted in certain countries. which use a lot of power when the engine is • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent switched off. Examples of functions that use a condensation. Slippery driving conditions lot of power: • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with Practise driving on slippery surfaces under • ventilation fan lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- controlled conditions to learn how the car ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel reacts. windscreen wiper • consumption while the engine is cold. For audio system (high volume) • more information on suitable oils, see 05 • parking lamps page 271. If the battery voltage is low, a message appears on the information display. The energy-saving IMPORTANT function shuts down certain functions or Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard reduces certain functions such as the ventila- driving or in hot weather. tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery by starting the engine. • The condition of the battery and charge Before a long journey level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its Check that the engine is working normally • capacity is reduced by the cold. and that fuel consumption is normal. Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil • • washer fluid reservoir. or other fluid). • Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. • Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.

205 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 206 evastarck

05 During your journey

Refuelling

Refuelling Opening/closing the fuel cap NOTE

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap WARNING! ACHTUNG! Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot AVERTISSEMENT! weather.

Opening the fuel filler flap manually G031391

G021459 A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in 05 the event of high outside temperatures. Open Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the the cap slowly.

lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the G021461 right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym- After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard. bol's arrow in the information display. The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a NOTE compartment is not possible. click confirms that it is closed. If the fuel cap is not properly closed 1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area or if the engine is running during refuelling (same side as fuel filler flap). then the symbol for a fault in the exhaust 2. Locate the green cord with handle. system is illuminated. However, this does not affect the performance of the car. 3. Pull it straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".

Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.

206 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 207 evastarck

05 During your journey

Fuel

General information on fuel IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended The use of other fuels for each respective Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as by Volvo must not be used as engine power • engine type, other than recommended here not to damage the catalytic converter. and fuel consumption is negatively affected. by Volvo, could cause engine damage and impaired performance. • In order that Volvo's warranty shall WARNING remain valid, never mix alcohol with pet- The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol- rol, as the fuel system could be dam- Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel vo's warranties as well as any supplemen- aged. tary service agreement. splashing in the eyes. • Do not use additives not recommended If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact by Volvo. lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with NOTE plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Extreme weather conditions, driving with a Catalytic converters trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- The purpose of the catalytic converters is to Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, nation with fuel grade are factors that could bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well purify exhaust gases. They are located close to affect the car's performance. the engine so that operating temperature is as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause 05 permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. reached quickly. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel Petrol The catalytic converters consist of a monolith has been swallowed. Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- WARNING and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- Fuel which spills onto the ground can be exceptional cases. ical reaction without being used up them- ignited. • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. selves. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- TM ting to refuel. formance and minimum fuel consumption. Lambda-sond oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system Never carry an activated mobile phone When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel when refuelling. The ring signal could cause fuel with the highest possible octane rating is spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, economy. recommended for optimum performance and leading to fire and injury. fuel economy. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con-

207 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 208 evastarck

05 During your journey

Fuel

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- (see page 70) for approx. 60 seconds before to air directed to the engine is continuously gent and water. the start attempt. adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and IMPORTANT Draining condensation from the fuel filter together with the three-way catalytic converter The fuel filter separates condensation from the reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car- Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- diesel standard. bon monoxide and nitrous oxides). tion. The sulphur content must be a maximum of The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals 50 ppm. Diesel specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 or if you suspect that the car has been filled standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con- IMPORTANT with contaminated fuel. taminants, such as excessively high volumes Diesel type fuels which must not be used: of sulphur particles for example. Only use die- IMPORTANT • Special additives sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use Certain special additives remove the water diesel of dubious quality. • Marine Diesel Fuel 05 separation in the fuel filter. At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin • Fuel oil precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which • RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- Diesel particle filter (DPF) may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel ble oil. Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, fuel designed for low temperatures around These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in which results in more efficient emission con- freezing point is available from the major oil accordance with Volvo recommendations trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- and generate increased wear and engine collected in the filter during normal driving. So- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- damage that is not covered by the Volvo called "regeneration" is started in order to burn warranty. cipitate. away the particles and empty the filter. This The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is requires the engine to have reached normal reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When Empty tank operating temperature. No special procedures are required if the tank refuelling, check that the area around the fuel Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the ically at an interval of approximately if the remote control is kept in key position II 300-900 km depending on driving conditions.

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

208 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 209 evastarck

05 During your journey

Fuel

Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It IMPORTANT may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during If the filter fills up with particles then it can regeneration. be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning. Then there Regeneration in cold weather is a risk that the filter will have to be If the car is frequently driven short distances in replaced. cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does Fuel consumption and emissions of not take place and the filter is not emptied. carbon dioxide Fuel consumption figures may change if the car When the filter has become approximately is equipped with extra equipment that affects 80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the the car's weight. Table, see page 275. instrument panel illuminates, and the message Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the The manner in which the car is driven, and instrument panel display. other non-technical factors can also affect fuel 05 consumption. Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- Consumption is higher and power output lower perature, preferably on a main road or motor- for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON. way. The car should then be driven for approximately ca 20 minutes more. NOTE When regeneration is complete the warning Extreme weather conditions, driving with a text is cleared automatically. trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that affect the car's performance. the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 210 evastarck

05 During your journey

General WARNING Securing loads The load capacity is affected by what is moun- The protection provided by the inflatable ted on the car, such as a towbar, load carriers curtain in the headlining may be compro- and roof box. The load capacity of the car is mised or eliminated by high loads. Never also reduced by the number of passengers and load cargo above the backrest. During their weight. heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. WARNING The car's driving characteristics change WARNING depending on the weight and distribution of Always secure the load. During heavy brak- the load. ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. G031966 Loading the cargo area Protect sharp edges with something soft. • Position the load firmly against the back- Each corner of the cargo area has attachment Turn off the engine and apply the parking 05 rest in front. points intended for the anchorage of loads. brake when loading or unloading long • Put wide loads in the centre. objects. Otherwise you may accidentally WARNING • Heavy objects should be placed as low as knock the gear lever or gear selector with possible. the load and cause a gear to engage and the Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are car to move off. Cover sharp edges with something soft to loose or protrude could cause injury during • heavy braking. avoid damaging the upholstery. Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- Lowering the rear seat backrest Always secure large and heavy objects with • a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. lets with straps or web lashings. To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seats of the car can be folded down, see WARNING page 74. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Always secure the load.

210 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 211 evastarck

05 During your journey

Cargo area

Bag holder* Safety net* WARNING Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured, even if the safety net is correctly fitted.

Installation

NOTE The safety net is most easily fitted via one of the rear doors. G017745 G034213

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. WARNING Make sure that the upper mountings of the The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and A safety net prevents loads or pets from being 05 prevents them from overturning and spreading thrown forward in the passenger compartment safety net are correctly fitted and that the anchoring straps are securely fastened. their contents across the cargo area. in the event of sudden braking. For safety reasons, the safety net must always be correctly Do not use a damaged net. 1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in fastened and secured. the cargo area. The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that 2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using can be secured two different locations in the the split upper rod is locked in extended the strap. car: position. • Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest 2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap Front fitting - Behind the front seat backr- • locks turned towards you. ests. 3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the tele- scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 212 evastarck

05 During your journey

Cargo area

- Take care to press forward the rod's IMPORTANT retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position. If the seat/backrest is pressed hard backwards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.

5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps. Removal and storage

Front fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front 05 roof mountings, hook the safety net's Rear fitting. anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the roof mountings, hook the safety net's backrests are straightened and the seats anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in are moved forward slightly. the cargo area. Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back The safety net can be easily removed and folded again - only adjust until the seat/backrest up. makes contact with the net. Release the tension in the net by pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out part of the strap. Press in the catch and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.

212 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 213 evastarck

05 During your journey

Cargo area

Break the rod in the centre, fold it together IMPORTANT and roll up the net. The safety grille cannot be folded up or The folded safety net can be stored under the down when a cargo cover is fitted. cargo compartment floor. Installation Safety grille* G018369

NOTE The safety grille is most easily fitted and removed by two people via the rear doors. G018367 When fitting, the handle, see illustration – , must be on the front of 05 the grille. G031978 The backrests must be lowered to allow the A safety grille prevents loads or pets from safety grille to be fitted, see page 74. being thrown forward in the passenger com- Position the handle in fitting position, see partment in the event of sudden braking. For illustration. Press gently on the handle to safety reasons, the grille must always be enable it to be turned into position, see mounted and secured correctly. G018368 arrow. Folding up Press the strut in towards the grille and Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and align the grille in the roof mounting. pull back/up. Turn the handle 90° . Press gently as in the illustration (1) if necessary. Secure the grille by angling the handle 90° .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 214 evastarck

05 During your journey

Cargo area

Removal Move the other end piece into the corres- Roof load Removal of the grille takes place in reverse ponding recess. Using load carriers order to the description in the related section Press both sides in. A "click" should be entitled "Installation". To avoid damaging the car and for maximum audible and the red marking should disap- possible safety while driving, the load carriers pear. designed by Volvo are recommended. Cargo cover* > Check that both end pieces are locked. Carefully follow the installation instructions Removing the cargo cover supplied with the carriers. 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out. • Check periodically that the load carriers 2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the and load are properly secured. Lash the other end piece loosens automatically. load securely with retaining straps. • Distribute the load evenly over the load Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the disc bottom. 05 In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear • The size of the area exposed to the wind, sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the and therefore fuel consumption, increase cargo area when it is fitted.

G031977 with the size of the load. ± Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it its support shelves, and lower. heavy braking and hard cornering. into the holes by the rear pillars in the cargo area. Long load WARNING The passenger seat backrest can also be The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- IMPORTANT folded for an extra long load, see page 72. racteristics are altered by roof loads. The safety grille cannot be folded up or For information on maximum permitted roof down when the cargo cover is fitted. load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 269. Fitting the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 215 evastarck

05 During your journey

Warning triangle

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations in force for the use of a warning triangle*. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic. Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use. First aid

A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area

Lift the floor mat and take out the warning triangle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 216 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

General nated and the information display shows Trailer cable If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then High engine temp Stop safely. Stop the An adapter is required if the car's towing the car is delivered with the necessary equip- car in a safe way and allow the engine to bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has ment for driving with a trailer. run at idling speed for several minutes and 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved cool down. If High engine temp Stop by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag The car's towing bracket must be of an • engine or Coolant level low, Stop on the ground. approved type. engine are shown then the engine must be • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your switched off after stopping the car. Direction indicators on trailer Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped • The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro- A symbol in the combined instrument panel for driving with a trailer. tection system that engages in the event of flashes when the direction indicators are used • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the overheating. If the temperature in the gear- and the trailer is connected. If the symbol weight on the towing bracket complies box is too high the warning symbol is illu- flashes more quickly then one of the lamps on with the specified maximum towball load. minated and the information display shows the car or the trailer is broken, see page 67. Transmission hot Reduce speed or • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- Automatic gearbox mended pressure for a full load. For tyre Transmission hot Stop safely. Follow 05 pressure label location, see page 261. the instructions and reduce speed or stop Parking on a hill the car in a safe way and allow the engine 1. Activate the parking brake. • Clean the towing bracket regularly and to run at idling speed for several minutes to grease the towball. enable the gearbox to cool down. In the 2. Move the gear selector to position P. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is event of overheating the car's air condi- Starting on a hill brand new. Wait until it has been driven at tioning may be temporarily switched off. 1. Move the gear selector to position D. least 1000 km. In the interests of safety, you should • 2. Release the parking brake. • The brakes are loaded much more than restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws usual on long and steep downhill slopes. of certain countries allow for higher Steep inclines Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speeds. • Do not use a higher manual gear than the speed. • Move the gear selector to position P when engine can "handle". It is not always eco- • The engine is loaded more heavily than parking an automatic car with a hitched nomical to drive in high gears. usual when driving with a trailer. trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of • If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot the wheels with chocks when parking a car more than 15%. climate, the engine may overheat. If the with hitched trailer on a hill. temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the warning symbol is illumi-

216 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 217 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Level control WARNING Storing the towball section The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar: maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, • Follow the assembly instructions for the which is normal. towball section carefully. • The towball section must be locked with Trailer weights the key before setting off. National vehicle regulations can limit trailer Check that the indicator window shows weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi- • green. fied for a higher towing weight than the car can actually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 270. Important checks G031713 • The towball section's towball must be Towball section storage location. WARNING cleaned and greased regularly. IMPORTANT 05 Follow the stated recommendations for NOTE trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer Always remove the towball section after use may be difficult to control in the event of If a towball hitch with vibration damper is and store it in the appointed location in the sudden movement and braking. used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- car, firmly fastened with its strap. ball.

Towing equipment If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the towball mounting instructions must be followed carefully, see page 218.

217 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 218 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Specifications Installing the towball

C D G018928

G E F G031974 Remove the protective cover by first press- G021485 ing in the catch and then pulling the Dimensions, mounting points (mm) cover straight back .

05 B A 1013 B 69

C 855

D 428

E 109 G021487 F 296

A G031973 Ensure that the mechanism is in the G Side member unlocked position by turning the key clock- H Ball centre wise.

218 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 219 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer G021488 G021490 G021494

The indicator window must show red. The indicator window must show green. Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in 05 accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT G021489 G000000 Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, Insert the towball section until you hear a Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- the remainder of the towball section should click. tion. Remove the key from the lock. be clean and dry.

219 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 220 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer G021495 G018929

Safety cable. Push in the locking wheel and turn it Push the protective cover until it snaps anticlockwise until you hear a click. tight. WARNING Trailer Stability Assist - TSA Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place. The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves 05 to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. The TSA function is part of the DSTC system Removing the towball (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see page 150. Function Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it The snaking phenomenon can occur with any comes to a stop. Hold it in this position car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking while pulling the towball rearward and occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is upward. a risk of it occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the WARNING load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if In order for snaking to occur, there must be a it is stored in the car, see page 217. unlocked position. triggering factor, e.g.:

220 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 221 evastarck

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and NOTE powerful side wind. If the driver chooses to deactivate (reduce) • Car with trailer drives on an uneven road the DSTC system, the TSA system is also surface or in a pothole. deactivated, see page 150. • Sweeping steering wheel movements. Operation TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe If snaking has started, it could be difficult or steering wheel movements to try to rectify the even impossible to suppress. This makes the snaking because in such a situation the TSA car/trailer combination difficult to control and system cannot determine whether it is the there is a risk that you could, for example, end trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking. up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. The DSTC symbol in the combined The TSA system continually monitors car instrument panel flashes when the movements, particularly lateral movements. If TSA is working. snaking is detected, the front wheels are indi- 05 vidually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/ trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car. If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 60 to 160 km/h.

221 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 222 evastarck

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Towing WARNING IMPORTANT Find out the highest legal speed for towing The brake servo and power steering do not Bump starting the car can damage the cat- before towing the car. work when the engine is switched off. The alytic converter. 1. Press the remote control key into the igni- brake pedal must be pressed about five tion switch to unlock the steering lock so times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal. that the car can be steered, see page 70. Towing eye Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed 2. The remote control key must remain in the Manual gearbox on the road. The towing eye is fastened in the ignition switch while the car is being towed. ± Move gear lever into neutral and release socket on the right-hand side of the bumper. 3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently the parking brake. After use, unscrew the towing eye and put it depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent back in its storage space. jerks. Automatic gearbox ± Move the gear selector to position N and 4. Be prepared to brake to stop. Fitting the towing eye release the parking brake.

05 WARNING IMPORTANT Insert the remote control key in the ignition Note that the car must always be towed with switch to unlock the steering lock (so that the wheels rolling forward. the car can be steered) before towing. • Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or WARNING further than 80 km. The steering lock stays in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering Jump starting Take out the towing eye from its storage lock must be unlocked before towing. The Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor space under the floor hatch in the cargo ignition must be in position II. Never remove area. the remote control key from the ignition battery if the battery is discharged to the extent switch while driving or when the car is being that the engine does not start, see page 97. > In some cases, the towing eye may be towed. hidden under the sill.

222 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 223 evastarck

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Recovery

IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. • An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km. G031971 WARNING Use a slotted screwdriver or a coin to The towing eye is only designed for towing detach the cover at its bottom edge. on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up 05 to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the towing eye.

NOTE On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar. For this reason it is advisable to store a detachable towbar towball in the car.

223 224 evastarck XC60 (Y413);9;3 Type approval 269 Specifications...... 267 Type designations...... 263 Car care...... 251 Wheels andtyres...... 243 Fuses...... 240 Battery...... 238 Wiper bladesandwasherfluid...... 231 Lamps...... 226 Engine compartment...... 276 ...... 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page224

G020922 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 225 evastarck

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 06 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 226 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

General WARNING Pull the handle by the pedals. An information symbol lights when the bonnet is open, Volvo service programme Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start see page 66. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- automatically some time after the engine ble, follow the Volvo service programme as has been switched off. Move the catch to the left and open the specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Always have the engine cleaned by a work- bonnet. (The catch hook is located Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is between the headlamp and grille, see illus- service and maintenance work. Volvo work- hot. tration.) shops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest qual- WARNING Opening and closing the bonnet ity of service. Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and Engine compartment, overview follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular G031910 06 intervals, e.g. when refuelling: • Coolant • Engine oil • Power steering fluid • Washer fluid

The appearance of the engine compartment may

G031911 vary depending on engine variant. Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir

226 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 227 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Engine oil dipstick Checking the engine oil IMPORTANT Radiator In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are Filler opening for engine oil filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand has been made very carefully with regard to drive) service life, starting characteristics, fuel Battery consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order Relay and fuse box, engine compartment that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of Filling washer fluid oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you G021733 Air filter. will risk affecting service life, starting cha- Label for oil grade. racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- WARNING mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. If the claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the High voltage output from the ignition sys- car is driven in adverse conditions, see Volvo's prescribed grade and viscosity is not used. tem. The voltage in the ignition system is recommendations, see page 271. highly dangerous. The ignition switch must therefore always be in position 0 during Volvo uses different systems for warning of low work in the engine compartment; see oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants 06 page 70. have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is in ignition position II or oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed when the engine is hot. via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer- tain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

227 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 228 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Filling and dipstick IMPORTANT time to run back to the sump. For capacities, see page 271 and onwards. When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 273. Checking with a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean. Checking the oil level in a new car is especially 2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must important before the first scheduled oil change. be between the MIN and MAX marks. The most accurate measurements are made on 3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start a cold engine before starting. The measure- by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN after the engine is switched off. The dipstick on the dipstick.

G031914 will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the IMPORTANT Petrol engine. oil sump. Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil consumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

WARNING 06 Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Checking with a warm engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean. G031915 G021737 2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. Diesel engine. The oil level must be within the area marked on the 3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start Change in accordance with the intervals speci- dipstick. by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Park the car on a level surface, switch off the until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil on the dipstick.

228 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 229 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Coolant IMPORTANT WARNING Checking and topping up the coolant • A high content of chlorine, chlorides Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant and other salts may cause corrosion in requires topping up when the engine is at the cooling system. operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion overpressure. agent as recommended by Volvo. • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant. Brake and clutch fluid • Mix the coolant with approved quality Checking the level tap water, see page 273. In the event of Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. G031918 with Volvo recommendations. Check the level regularly. • When changing coolant/replacing cool- When topping up the coolant, follow the ing system components, flush the cool- Change the brake fluid every other year or at instructions on the packaging. It is important ing system clean with approved quality every other regular service. that the mixture of coolant concentrate and tap water, or flush with ready-mixed For capacities and recommended fluid grade, coolant, see page 273. water is correct for the prevailing weather con- see page 273. The fluid should be changed ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk • The engine must only be run with a well- annually on cars driven in conditions requiring 06 of freezing increases with both too little and too filled cooling system. High tempera- hard, frequent braking, such as driving in much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see tures can occur, causing a risk of mountains or tropical climates with high page 273. damage (cracks) to the cylinder head. humidity.

Check the coolant regularly WARNING The level must lie between the MIN and MAX If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the marks on the expansion tank. If the system is brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could before topping up the brake fluid. The rea- occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine. son for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

229 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 230 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Filling Power steering fluid G031921

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side. The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover IMPORTANT over the cold section in the engine compart- Keep the area around the power steering ment. The round cover must be removed first fluid reservoir clean when checking. before the reservoir cap can be reached. 1. Turn and open the cover located on the 06 Check the level frequently. The most accurate covering. measurements are made on a cold engine 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. before starting. The fluid does not require The level must be between the MIN and changing. The fluid level must be between the MAX marks, which are located on the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and rec- inside of the reservoir. ommended fluid grade, see page 273.

IMPORTANT NOTE Remember to close the cap. If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.

230 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 231 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

General Front lamp housing Removing the headlamp All bulbs are specified, see page 237. Bulbs 1. Press quickly on the START-/STOP button and spotlights that are of a special type or that and remove the remote control key. are only suitable for replacement by a work- 2. (Upper illustration) shop are: Withdraw the lamp housing's locking General interior lighting in the roof, reading • pins. lamps • Glovebox lighting Pull the lamp housing straight forward. • Direction indicators, door mirror G031935 IMPORTANT • Direction indicators, rear • Approach light duration Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector • Position lamp • Active Xenon lamps 3. (Lower illustration) • LED lamps Detach the lamp housing connector by WARNING pressing down the clip with your thumb. G031936 At the same time, guide out the con- On cars with Xenon headlamps, Xenon lamp 06 replacement must be carried out at an nector with your other hand. authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are must be handled with extreme caution due replaced by first removing the whole lamp 4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a to the Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit. housing from the engine compartment. soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. 5. Replace the bulb in question. IMPORTANT WARNING Always switch off the ignition and remove Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with the remote control key before starting to your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- replace a bulb. gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

231 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 232 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Installing the headlamp Removing the cover Dipped beam, halogen G032356 G032250 G032251

When installing, check that the long lock pin is Before starting to replace a bulb, see 1. Detach the headlamp. engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes. page 231. 2. Remove the cover. 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound 1. Release the catches by pressing out. should be heard. 3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder 2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out. downwards. 2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking 06 pins. Check that they are correctly Reinstall the cover in reverse order. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. inserted. 5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it 3. Check the lighting. in. It can only be secured in one position. The lamp housing must be plugged in and Reinstall the parts in reverse order. installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

232 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 233 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Main beam, Halogen Extra main beam, Xenon* Direction indicators/flashers G032252 G032253 G032358

1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 2. Remove the cover. 2. Remove the cover. 2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise. 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the 4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight 4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight bulb. out. out. 06 4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in 5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the 5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the and turning anticlockwise. socket. It can only be secured in one posi- socket. It can only be secured in one position. tion. 5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. 6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 234 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Side marker lamps Front fog lamps Rear fog lamp G032357 G031937 G032359

Before starting to replace a bulb, see Undo the cover by pulling out the top corner, The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the page 231. closest to the grille, see the illustration above. bumper 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Pull the cover straight out in the direction 1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- of the centre of the car using a tool, see the clockwise. 2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and illustration above. remove it. 2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in 06 2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and and turning anticlockwise. 3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. remove the fog lamp. It can only be installed in one way. 3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock- 3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it. wise. 4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn clockwise. 4. Fit a new bulb and turn clockwise. 4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. 5. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward.

234 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 235 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Location of rear bulbs Brake lights and reversing lamps Number plate lighting G032485 G031939 G031940

Lamp lens, right-hand side Both the brake light and the reversing lamp 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. Position (LED)/side marker lamps bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area. 2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing Side reflector, rear 1. Open the panel. and withdraw it. Brake light 2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- 3. Replace the bulb. clockwise. Reversing lamp 4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it 06 3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in into place. Indicator and turning anticlockwise. Brake light (LED) 4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise. 5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

235 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 236 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Courtesy lighting Lighting, cargo area Vanity mirror lighting Removing the mirror glass G031941 G031942 G031943 Before starting to replace a bulb, see 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so page 231. that the lamp housing comes loose. 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower 1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the 2. Replace the bulb. edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lens closest to the tunnel console and turn 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press lug on the edge. gently so that the lens comes loose. back the lamp housing. 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge (Applies to both lamps). 06 on the left and right-hand sides (by the 2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose. black rubber sections), and prize carefully 3. Replace the bulb. so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge. 4. Refit the lens. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover. 4. Replace the bulb. Fitting the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mirror glass back into position.

236 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 237 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into Lighting Out- Type position. put (W) Specification, bulbs Front side marker 5 W3WLL Lighting Out- Type lamps put (W) Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular lamp Extra main beam, 65 H9 SV8.5 Xenon, ABL

Dipped beam, hal- 55 H7 LL ogen

Main beam, Halo- 65 H9 gen

Front direction 21 PY21W indicators

Front fog lamps 35 H8 06

Courtesy lighting, 5 Tubular cargo area lighting, lamp number plate light- SV8.5 ing

Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular lamp SV5.5

237 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 238 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades For more information on wipers and washing, see page 86. Service position The wiper blades must be in service position to facilitate replacement or washing.

1. Turn the remote control key to position 0, G021761 see page 70, and keep the remote control key in the ignition switch.

2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for G021763 about 1 second. The wipers then move to standing straight up. NOTE The wipers return to the starting position when The wiper blades are different lengths. The the car is started. blade on the driver's side is longer than the blade on the passenger side.

Replacing the wiper blades G021762

06 Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. Check that the blade is firmly installed. G021760

238 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 239 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid G032770

1. Pull the wiper arm straight out. 2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow). 3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end G031927 position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily. 06 The windscreen and headlamp washers share 4. Press the new wiper blade into position. a common reservoir. Check that it is firmly installed. 5. Lower the wiper arm. IMPORTANT Add washer antifreeze during the winter so Cleaning that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see reservoir and hoses. page 263. For capacities, see page 273.

239 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 240 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Avoid sparks and naked IMPORTANT Use protective goggles. flames. Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion. Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which Further information in the can be generated if you connect jump leads owner's manual. incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities NOTE of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek Store the battery out of medical attention immediately. the reach of children. An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead. NOTE The life of the battery is shortened if it 06 becomes discharged repeatedly. Operation The battery contains cor- • Check that the cables to the battery are rosive acid. correctly connected and properly tightened. • Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running. The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.

240 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 241 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Changing WARNING Removal Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.

Detach the black negative cable G021768 Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the battery Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp. Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

G021769 Installation

Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes. 06 Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away. G021771

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

241 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 242 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the clamp. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. 5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See Removal). 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal).

242 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 243 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

General Location, fuse boxes All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. In which case, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system

checked. G031925 Changing Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive. 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse box 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side changes , to under the side of the glovebox. to see whether the curved wire has blown. Under the glovebox 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse Engine compartment of the same colour and amperage. 06 Cargo area WARNING Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

243 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 244 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment

06 G025600 G031926

244 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 245 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

General fuses, engine compartment Pos Function A Pos Function A On the inside of the cover are tweezers that facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses. Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50 Speed related power 5 steering Positions (see preceding illustration) - - Engine compartment, upper Engine Control Module 10 PTC Air preheater* 100 (ECM), transm. SRS Engine compartment, front Heated washer nozzles 10 Engine compartment, lower - - These fuses are all located in the engine com- Windscreen wipers 30 - - partment box. Fuses in are located under Parking heater* 25 Lighting panel 5 . • Fuses 1 – 7 and 42 – 44 are of the "Midi Ventilation fan 40 Headlamp washers 15 Fuse" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop. - - 12 V socket, front and rear 15 seat 8 – 15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and • ABS pump 40 must only be replaced by an authorised Sunroof*, Roof console/ 5 Volvo workshop. ECC* ABS valves 20 06 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 are of the "MiniFuse" • Relay, engine compart- 5 type. - - ment box Pos Function A Headlamp levelling*, 10 Auxiliary lamps* 20 Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50 (Active Bi-Xenon* Horn 15 Primary fuse CEM 20 Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50 Engine Control Module 10 Radar, ACC control mod- 5 Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60 (ECM) ule* Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60 Control module, auto- 15 matic gearbox*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 246 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Pos Function A Compressor A/C 15 Glow plugs (diesel) 70

Relay coils 5 - -

Starter motor relay 30 Cooling fan 80

Ignition coils 20

Glow system (5-cyl. die- 10 sel)

Engine control module, 10 Throttle petrol

Engine control module, 15 Throttle diesel

Injection system, Mass air 15 flow sensor 06 Engine valves 10

EVAP, Lambda-sond, 15 Injection (petrol)

Lambda sond (diesel) 10

Diesel filter heater, crank- 15 case ventilation heater (diesel)

- -

246 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 247 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Under the glovebox

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 G032918

1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the Pos Function A Pos Function A fuse box. Accelerator pedal*, air 7,5 Sunroof* 20 2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 06 heater (PTC)*, heated seats 3. The fuses are accessible. Reversing lamps 7,5 - - Positions - - Pos Function A ICM display, CD & Radio, 15 RSE system* Fog lamp, front* 15 Rain sensor* 5 Steering wheel module 7,5 Windscreen washers 15 SRS system 10 - - Adaptive cruise control, 10 ABS brakes 5 ACC* Main beam 15

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 248 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A - -

Roof lighting, control panel 7,5 driver's door/Power passenger seat*

Information display 5

Power driver's seat* 5

Windscreen wiper, rear 15

Remote control key 5 receiver, alarm sensors

Fuel pump 20

Electric steering lock 20

06 - -

Lock, tank/tailgate 10

Alarm siren, ECC 5

Start/stop button 5

Brake light switch 5

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 249 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Cargo area

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery Pos Module (black). A Pos Module (black). A on the left-hand side. Function Function Positions 06 Control panel, rear door, 25 Power seat driver's side* 25 Pos Module (black). A right Function Trailer socket 1* 40 - - Control panel, driver's door 25 POT (automatic tailgate 30 12 V socket, cargo area 15 opening)* Control panel, passenger 25 door Rear window defroster 30

Control panel, rear door, left 25 - -

Trailer socket 2* 15

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 250 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Module (white). A Pos Module (blue). Func- A Function tion Parking assistance, Parking 5 Display RTI* 10 camera* - - Control module Four C* 15 Bass speaker* 25 Seat heating, driver's side 15 front* DAB radio 5

Seat heating, passenger side 15 Audio amplifier* 25 front* Audio system 15 Seat heating right rear* 15 Phone, Bluetooth* 5 AWD control module 10 - - Seat heating left rear* 15 -

- - 06 Power seat passenger side* 25

Keyless drive* 20

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 251 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

General NOTE New tyres Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- Ensure that tyres of the same type and ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- dimensions, and also the same make, are sure and speed rating are important for how the fitted to all four wheels. car performs. Direction of rotation Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 262.

Tyre care

Tyre age G021823 All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem Tyres are perishable. After a few years they undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even begin to harden at the same time as the friction if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. tion can therefore be affected. This also applies For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as G021778 to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for possible when you replace them. This is espe- future use. Examples of external signs which cially important with regard to winter tyres. The The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. 06 indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are week and year of manufacture, the tyre's DOT Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed cracks or discoloration. marking (Department of Transportation), are to only turn in one direction have the direction stated with four digits, for example 1502. The of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must tyre in the illustration was manufactured in always rotate in the same direction throughout week 15 of 2002. its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never Summer and winter tyres between left and right-hand sides, or vice When summer and winter wheels are changed versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the the wheels should be marked with which side car's braking characteristics and capacity to of the car they were mounted on, for example force rain and slush out of the way are L for left and R for right. adversely affected.

251 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 252 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Wear and maintenance Tyres with tread wear indicators Only use rims that are tested and approved by The correct tyre pressure results in more even Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso- wear, see page 262. Driving style, tyre pres- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench. sure, climate and road condition affect how Locking wheel bolts quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear minium and steel rims. patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km Winter tyres and then at 10 000 km intervals. Contact an Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent about tread depth. on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, G021829 Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging the correct tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. up - and not standing up. Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the WARNING side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear NOTE A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types of the car. to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height are most suitable. with the tread wear indicators. Change to new 06 tyres as soon as possible. Remember that Studded tyres tyres with little tread depth provide very poor Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for grip in rain and snow. 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into Rims and wheel bolts the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life. IMPORTANT NOTE The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the The legal provisions for the use of studded nuts and the bolts. tyres vary from country to country.

252 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 253 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Tread depth located inside the air valve in each wheel. NOTE Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the peratures place considerably higher demands system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres- The engine must not be running. on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there- sure is too low then a warning lamp on the fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres instrument panel illuminates and a message is The settings are made with the control in the that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime- shown on the display. centre console. see page 116 tres. Always check the system after changing a 1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure wheel in order to ensure that replacement and select ignition position I or II. Using snow chains wheels work with the system. 2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure For information on correct tyre pressure, see IMPORTANT page 262. 3. Select Tyre pressure Calibration. Only single-sided snow chains are permit- The system does not replace normal tyre main- 4. Press ENTER. ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or sim- tenance. ilar that are properly suited to the car model, 5. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for tyre size and wheel rim size. Consult an at least 1 minute. authorised Volvo workshop. IMPORTANT Rectifying low tyre pressure If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure When the message Tire pressure low is system a warning lamp on the instrument Snow chains may only be used on the front shown on the display wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will 1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres. 06 Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow be shown. This can be for various reasons, The tyres should be cold, see page 262. chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- wears out both the snow chains and tyres. sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni- 2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure. toring system. Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space 3. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for between the brake discs and the wheels is too at least 1 minute and check that the mes- small. Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring sage disappears. Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in Tyre pressure monitoring, TPMS* order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom- TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) mendations, when driving with a heavy load for warns the driver when the pressure is too low example. in one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 254 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Deactivating/activating tyre pressure • Volvo recommends that sensors are not WARNING monitoring moved between different wheels. SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres. NOTE WARNING SST tyres must only be fitted together with The engine must not be running. When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, TPMS. hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve. After a fault message on low tyre pressure Settings are made in the controls in the centre has been shown, do not drive faster than console, see page 116 80 km/h. 1. Select ignition position I or II. Driveable punctured tyres* Maximum driving distance to tyre change is If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have 80 km. 2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure been selected then the car is also equipped Avoid hard driving. with TPMS. 3. Select Tyre press. syst and press SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- ENTER. This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side aged or punctured. > A X is shown in the display if the system wall that makes continued driving possible is activated, the option disappears if the despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres system is deactivated. are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can Tools also be fitted to this rim). Recommendations If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel- 06 Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu- TPMS sensors in the valves. minates and a message is shown in the text • The temporary spare wheel does not have panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to this sensor. max. 80 km/h. • If wheels without TPMS sensors are used Drive carefully. In order to establish which tyre then Tyre press. syst Service required needs attention, check the tyre pressure on all will be shown every time the car is driven four tyres. The tyre should be checked as soon faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 as possible. minutes. G031900 • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 255 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

A foam block, located in the cargo area, con- The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel The tools and jack must be returned to their tains all tools. The tools consist of a towing eye, well with the outside down. Two foam blocks, correct places after use. The jack must be jack* and wheel wrench*. The foam block is one under the spare wheel and one over/inside cranked to the correct position in order to have screwed into a bracket in the bottom of the affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one space. spare wheel well. contains all tools. The foam block and spare wheel must be Jack* The same bolt runs through to secure the spare replaced in the reverse order to taking out. wheel and the foam blocks. The original jack should only be used for Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam changing wheels. The jack's thread must Taking out the spare wheel block. It must point forwards in the car. always be well greased. 1. Raise the floor hatch and floor mat, from the back and forward. IMPORTANT Spare wheel* 2. Undo the retaining screw. The tools and jack must be stored in the The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended location in the car's cargo area intended for temporary use. Replace the spare 3. Lift out the foam block with its tools. when not in use. wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible. 4. Lift out the spare wheel. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure The lower block does not need to be lifted out. Changing wheels for the spare wheel is stated on the tyre pres- Tools - returning into place Removing sure table, see page 262. Set up the warning triangle, see page 215 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The 06 IMPORTANT car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur- Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare face. wheel on the car. 1. Apply the parking brake and engage first gear, or position P if the car has an auto- IMPORTANT matic gearbox. The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel. G029336

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 256 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE Use the jack belonging to the car.

2. Take out the spare wheel, jack, wheel wrench and wrench for the lockable wheel G031901 G032149 bolts. 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the WARNING IMPORTANT wheels which will remain on the ground. Never position anything between the The jack mounting point is the rearmost of Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones. ground and the jack, nor between the jack- the two rear recesses. ing point and the jack. 7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. 5. There are two jacking points on each side Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the 06 of the car. There is a recess in the plastic wheel. cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the Installation ground. 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub. 6. Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as illustrated and that the foot is positioned 2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts vertically under the anchorage. so that there is no space between the

G021779 wheel and brake disc. 3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot 4. Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anticlock- rotate and remove the jack wise with the wheel wrench.

256 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 257 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING must be replaced before its expiration date and after use. Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread. Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. NOTE Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between The emergency puncture repair kit is only them and the road. intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread. G021780 Emergency puncture repair* The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency important that the wheel bolts are tight- puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check cracks or similar damage. the torque with a torque wrench. 12 V sockets for the compressor are located by 5. Fit the hub cap (for cars with steel wheel the centre console in the front, by the rear seat rims). and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre. 06 NOTE The hubcap outlet for the valve must be Taking out the emergency puncture

located over the valve on the rim when fit- G032468 repair kit ted. Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf- General ficked location. The emergency puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the The emergency puncture repair kit is used to floor in the cargo area. seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor 1. Raise the floor hatch and floor mat, from and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as the back and forward. a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle 2. Unscrew the retaining screw.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 258 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

3. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit. Protective cap Sealing punctured tyres Replace the parts after use. Pressure reducing valve

WARNING Air hose You should not drive faster than 80 km/h Sealing fluid bottle after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be Pressure gauge changed as soon as possible (maximum driving distance: 200 km).

Overview

06 G014338

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration. 1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture Label, maximum permitted speed repair kit. Switch 2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel. Cable Bottle holder (orange cap)

258 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 259 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and WARNING start the car. The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole case of contact with skin, wash away the in the tyre is too big. The journey should not fluid with soap and water. WARNING be continued. Contact an authorised tyre Never stand next to the tyre when the com- centre. 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be locate the cable and the air hose. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the switched off immediately. The journey pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum should not be continued. Contact an NOTE authorised tyre centre. pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is 3.5 bar. Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is broken when the bottle is screwed in. NOTE 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket. When the compressor starts, the pressure 4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure 12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit bottle's stopper. drops after approximately 30seconds. the valve cap. 13. As soon as possible, drive approximately WARNING 8. Flick the switch to position I. 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. IMPORTANT Rechecking the repair and pressure 06 Risk of overheating. The compressor must 1. Reconnect the equipment. 5. Screw the bottle into its holder. not run for more than 10 minutes. 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure 6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw gauge. in the air hose valve connection to the bot- 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. • If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should WARNING not be continued. Contact a tyre centre. • If the tyre pressure is higher than Do not leave children in the car without 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the supervision when the engine is running. pressure specified on the tyre pressure

259 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 260 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

label. Release air using the pressure WARNING 3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too sockets and start the car. high. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- to position I. WARNING shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped mum driving distance is 200 km). IMPORTANT with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. Risk of overheating. The compressor must Inflating the tyres not run for more than 10 minutes. 3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air The car's original tyres can be inflated by the hose and cable. Refit the dust cap. compressor. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on 4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit 1. The compressor must be switched off. the tyre pressure label, (release air using to the cargo area. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- and locate the cable and air hose. sure is too high.) NOTE 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be in the air hose valve connection to the bot- hose and cable. replaced after use. Replacement must be tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. performed by an authorised Volvo work- 7. Refit the dust cap. shop. WARNING Replacing the sealing fluid canister 06 Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in Replace the bottle when the expiration date WARNING danger to life. Never leave the engine run- has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- mentally hazardous waste. Check the tyre pressure regularly. ficient ventilation.

Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the dam- WARNING aged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre Do not leave children in the car without contains sealing fluid. supervision when the engine is running.

260 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 261 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING 94 Tyre load index W 270 km/h

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural W Speed rating for maximum permitted Y 300 km/h rubber-latex. speed (in this case 270 km/h). Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic NOTE reaction in the event of skin contact. Speed ratings Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. The car is approved as a whole, which means It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table. Store out of the reach of children. that dimensions and speed ratings must not differ from those specified on the car's registration document.1 Tyre pressure NOTE The only exception to these conditions is win- Leave the container at a collection point for ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those storing dangerous waste. without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre. (For example, class Q can be driven at a Specifications maximum of 160 km/h). Designation of dimensions Traffic regulations determine how fast a car The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres. Example of designation: 06 235/60 R18 94 W. Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) G021830 T 190 km/h 235 Section width (mm) The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door H 210 km/h pillar (between front and rear door) shows 60 Ratio between section height and which pressures the tyres should have at dif- width (%) V 240 km/h ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also R Radial ply specified in the tyre pressure table, see below.

18 Rim diameter in inches (")

1 There may be deviations in certain markets. ``

261 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 262 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended • Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare) NOTE wheel dimension Temperature differences change tyre pres- • ECO pressure sure.

Recommended tyre pressure Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 – 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA (km/h) Front (kPa)B Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa) All engines 235/65 R 17 0 – 160 240 240 270 270 270

235/60 R 18 160 + 240 240 270 270 - 235/55 R 19

Spare wheelC T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.

06 Fuel economy, ECO pressure tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- NOTE At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre ture as the ambient temperature. pressure for full load is recommended in order Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also to obtain optimum fuel economy. sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs varies depending on ambient temperature. Checking the tyre pressure the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres The tyre pressures must be checked every overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- month. This also applies to the car's spare sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and wheel. After several few kilometres of driving, steering characteristics. the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold

262 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 263 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Washing the car IMPORTANT everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. mended for achieving optimum results. Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for Use car shampoo. example. NOTE • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- NOTE tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork is more sensitive when it is new. paintwork very quickly. An authorised Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog Volvo workshop is recommended for the lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have High-pressure washing removal of any discoloration. condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting When using high-pressure washing, use • Hose down the underbody. is designed to withstand this. Condensation sweeping movements and make sure that the • Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. is normally vented out of the lamp housing nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the Do not rinse directly onto the locks. when it has been switched on for a time. surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water. Cleaning the wiper blades locks. • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, Testing the brakes soap solution or car shampoo. as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. • Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty WARNING surfaces. 06 NOTE Always test the brakes after washing the • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or car, including the parking brake, to ensure a water scraper. Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- that moisture and corrosion do not attack ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car the brake linings and reduce braking per- WARNING shampoo. formance. Do not use any strong solvents. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then hot. Automatic car washes when driving long distances in rain or slush. An automatic car wash is a simple and quick The heat from the friction causes the brake lin- way of washing the car, but it cannot reach ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

263 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 264 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim Polishing and waxing Cleaning front side windows that have components Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull a water-repellent surface* A special cleaning agent available from Volvo or to give the paintwork extra protection. Never use products such as car wax, dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured The car does not need to be polished until it is degreaser or similar on glass surfa- plastic parts, rubber and trim components, at least one year old. However, the car can be ces as this could ruin their water-repellent such as glossy trim mouldings. When using waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax properties. such a cleaning agent the instructions must be the car in direct sunlight. Take care when cleaning so as not to damage followed carefully. Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you the glass surface. IMPORTANT begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt To avoid damaging glass surfaces when and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers. Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed rubber. There is natural wear of the water-repellent using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint- coating. When using degreasant on plastic and rub- work. ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- Treatment with a special finishing agent avail- Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- essary. Use a soft washing sponge. able from Volvo dealers is recommended in uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear order to maintain the water-repellent proper- packaging carefully. Many preparations con- away or damage the glossy surface layer. ties. This should be used first after three years tain both polish and wax. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must and then each year. not be used. 06 IMPORTANT Rustproofing – inspection and Rims Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, maintenance protection, lustre sealing or similar could Only use cleaning agent recommended by damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage The car received a thorough and complete Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage caused by such treatments is not covered rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated by Volvo warranty. are made of galvanised sheet metal. The aluminium rims. underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 265 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does Treating stains on leather upholstery IMPORTANT not require treatment for approximately 12 Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and years. After this period, it should be treated at approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex Note that materials with colour that runs three-year intervals. Please contact an author- when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) 100 standard. may discolour the upholstery material. ised Volvo workshop if the car needs further The leather is refined and processed so that it treatment. retains its natural characteristics. It is given a Washing instructions for leather Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is protective coating, but regular cleaning is upholstery important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- required in order to maintain both characteris- 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened proofing needs to be checked regularly and tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre- sponge and squeeze out a strong foam. touched-up if necessary in order for it to be hensive product for the cleaning and treatment maintained. of leather upholstery which, when used in 2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular accordance with the instructions, preserves movements. Cleaning the interior the leather's protective coating. After a period 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the of use the natural appearance of the leather will Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the nevertheless emerge, depending more or less ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly stain. Do not rub. on the surface texture of the leather. This is a and follow the instructions included with the natural maturing of the leather and shows that 4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and car care product. it is a natural product. allow the leather to dry completely. Stains on fabric upholstery and roof To achieve best results Volvo recommends Protective treatment of leather 06 upholstery cleaning and application of the protective upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from cream once to four times per year (or more if 1. Pour a small amount of the protective authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's cream on the felted cloth and massage in avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of Leather care product. a thin layer of cream with gentle circular the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic movements on the leather. detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the IMPORTANT 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. Never use strong solvents. Such products before use. may damage fabric, vinyl and leather IMPORTANT The leather has now been given improved pro- upholstery. tection against stains and improved UV pro- Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the tection. fabric upholstery.

265 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 266 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal Colour code Before work is begun, the car must be clean and wood parts and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C. A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the moistened with water, available from Volvo damaged surface. Then remove the tape to dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior remove any loose paint. parts and surfaces. 2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail- brush once the primer is dry. able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning. 3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect Carpets and cargo area the undamaged paintwork. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of 4. After a few days, polish the touched-up the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a It is important that the exact correct colour is areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. used. The product decal specifies the car's of lapping paste. colour code, see page 267. Touching up paintwork NOTE Repairing stone chips Paint is an important part of the car's rust- If the stone chip has not penetrated to the proofing and should therefore be checked reg- 06 bare metal and there is an undamaged col- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged our coat, you can paint straight after clean- paintwork should be rectified immediately. The ing the damaged surface. most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings and doors. Materials • primer in a can • paint in a can or touch-up pen • brush G021832 • masking tape

266 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 267 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

Decal location

267 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 268 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories. Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. Label for parking heater. Engine type designation, component and serial number. The engine oil decal specifies oil grade and viscosity. Gearbox type designation and serial number. Manual gearbox 06 Automatic gearbox Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number) Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

268 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 269 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Dimensions

Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Weights Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank A Wheelbase 2774 H Rear track 1586 90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen- 06 gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load B Length 4628 I Load width, floor 1090 carriers, space box etc. and towball load (when C Load length, floor, folded J Width 1891 a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the rear seat 1789 payload and must not be included in the kerb K Width including door mir- weight. Permitted weight (in addition to driver) D Load length, floor 972 rors 2142 = Gross vehicle weight – Kerb weight. E Height 1713

F Load height 802

G Front track 1632

269 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 270 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

WARNING Max. front axle load The car's driving characteristics change Max. rear axle load depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed. Equipment level Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 100 kg. G017755

For information on label location, see page 226.

06 Gross vehicle weight Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Towing capacity and towball load Model Transmission Trailer weight with Towball load (kg) Trailer weight with- Towball load (kg) brake (kg) out brake (kg) All All 0–1200 50 max. 750 50

T6 Automatic (TF–80SC) AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50

270 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 271 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Model Transmission Trailer weight with Towball load (kg) Trailer weight with- Towball load (kg) brake (kg) out brake (kg) D5 Automatic AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50

D5 Manual AWD 1800 75 max. 750 50

2.4D Automatic AWD 2000 90 max. 750 50

2.4D Manual AWD 1600 75 max. 750 50

NOTE The use of stabilising devices is recommended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine specifications Model Engine Output Output Torque (Nm/ No. of Bore (mm) Stroke (mm) Swept vol- Compres- (kW/ (hp/ rpm) cylin- ume sion ratio 06 rpm) rpm) ders (litres) T6 B6304T2 210/5600 285/5600 400/1500–4800 6 82 93.2 2,953 9.3:1

D5 D5244T4 136/4000 185/4000 400/2000 – 2750 5 81 93.1 2.400 17,3:1

2.4D D5244T5 120/4000 163/4000 340/1750–2750 5 81 93.1 2.400 17,3:1

271 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 272 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Engine oil Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection Adverse driving conditions for the engine. Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. Check the oil level more frequently for long IMPORTANT journeys: In order to fulfil the requirements for the • towing a caravan or trailer engine's service intervals all engines are • in mountainous regions filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil

• at high speeds has been made very carefully with regard to G021834 • in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot- service life, starting characteristics, fuel ter than +40 °C consumption and environmental impact. An Viscosity chart approved engine oil must be used in order • shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 that the recommended service intervals can km) at low temperatures (under 5 °C). be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of This can produce abnormally high oil tempera- oil (see the engine compartment decal) for ture or oil consumption. both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environ- 06 mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

272 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 273 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Oil label Engine variant Volume between MIN and Volume MAX (litres) (litres) T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4

D5 D5244T4 1.5 6.0 2.4D D5244T5 G032078

When the label shown here is fitted in the car's engine compartment then the following applies. For information on label location, see page 226. Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 06

Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade Transmission oil Manual (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309

Transmission oil Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.0 Transmission fluid: JWS 3309

273 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 274 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade Coolant Petrol engine T6 8.9 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with Diesel engine D5 12,65 waterA, see packaging. Diesel engine 2.4D

Air conditioning - Oil: PAG Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)B

Brake fluid 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering 1.2 Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water. Cars without headlamp washing 4,5

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information. 06 NOTE Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be replaced during the car's service life. However, this may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 272.

274 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 275 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Consumption, emissions and volume Emissions of car- Consumption Tank volume Model Engine Transmission bon dioxide(CO , (litre/100 km) 2 (litres) g/km) T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF–80SC) 11.9 284 approx. 70 AWD

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) AWD 7.5 199 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF–80SC) 8.3 219 approx. 70 AWD

2.4D D5244T5 Manual (M66) AWD 7.5 199 approx. 70

2.4D D5244T5 Automatic (TF–80SC) 8.3 219 approx. 70 AWD

Fuel consumption and emissions of Electrical system IMPORTANT carbon dioxide 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- If the battery is replaced, replace it with a 06 Official fuel consumption figures are based on nator. Single pole system in which the chassis battery of the same cold start capacity and a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU and engine block are used as conductors. The reserve capacity as the original (see the Directive 80/1268comb. negative terminal is connected to the chassis. decal on the battery). The manner in which the car is driven, and other non-technical factors affect fuel consumption. For more information, see page 11.

Performance, battery Voltage (V) Cold start capacity (A) Reserve capacity (min) T6 12 520-700 100-135

D5, 2.4D 12 700-800 135-160

275 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 276 evastarck

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type approval

Remote control system Country A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, Delphi hereby GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, certifies that this LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, remote control sys- SK, SLO tem conforms to the essential character- IS, LI, N, CH istic requirements HR and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151

BR 06

CCAB06LP1940T4

276 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 277 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

A Alarm...... 56 Audio volume alarm indicator...... 56 phone...... 194 ACC – Adaptive cruise control...... 153 alarm signals...... 57 phone/media player...... 194 Active chassis – FOUR-C...... 151 arming...... 56 ring signal, phone...... 194 checking the alarm...... 44 Active Xenon Lights...... 78 AUTO deactivating...... 56 climate control settings...... 125 Adapting driving characteristics...... 151 deactivating a triggered alarm...... 56 Automatic car washes...... 263 Adaptive cruise control...... 153 reduced alarm level...... 57 fault tracing...... 157 temporary disarming of the alarm...... 57 Automatic gearbox...... 98 radar sensor...... 156 testing the alarm system...... 58 manual gear positions (Geartronic)...... 99 towing and recovery...... 222 Adaptive cruise control fault tracing...... 157 Allergy and asthma inducing sub- Automatic locking...... 50 Additional heater...... 132 stances...... 122 Automatic relocking...... 50 Additional heater (Diesel)...... 132 All-wheel drive, AWD...... 102 AUX...... 133 Adjusting headlamp pattern...... 82 All Wheel Drive (AWD)...... 102 Active Xenon headlamps...... 83 Approach light, duration...... 82 AWD, All-wheel drive...... 102 halogen headlamp...... 83 Audio Adjusting the steering wheel...... 76 headphones socket...... 134 B Airbag rear control panel...... 134 settings...... 135 activating/deactivating, PACOS...... 22 Backrest...... 72 deactivating/activating...... 22 surround...... 133 front seat, lowering...... 72 07 driver's and front passenger side...... 20 Audio system...... 133 Backrest rear seat, lowering...... 74 Air conditioning...... 125 functions...... 135 Battery...... 240 general...... 121 overview...... 133 maintenance...... 240 Air conditioning, AC...... 125 remote control key/PCC...... 47 Air distribution...... 122, 127 start assistance...... 97 Air vents...... 123

277 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 278 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

symbols on the battery...... 240 C Checking and topping up the coolant..... 229 warning symbols...... 240 Children...... 32 Blind spot (BLIS)...... 185 Calls child safety locks...... 37 functions during a call...... 197, 198 Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 185 child seats and side airbags...... 24 incoming...... 193, 197 location in the car...... 32 Bluetooth operation...... 193, 197 safety...... 32 handsfree...... 192 volume in phone...... 198 Child safety locks...... 55 mute microphone...... 194 waiting...... 198 transfer call to mobile...... 194 Child seat...... 32 Call waiting...... 198 Bonnet, opening...... 226 Child seats...... 32 Camera sensor...... 163, 169 Brake and clutch fluid...... 229 integrated two-stage booster cushion. 35 Car care...... 263 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37 Brake light...... 79 Car care, leather upholstery...... 265 recommended...... 33 Brakes...... 103 Cargo area size classes for child seats with the ISO- anti-lock braking system, ABS...... 103 cargo cover...... 214 FIX fixture system...... 37 brake light...... 79 lighting...... 81 upper mounting points for child seats.. 39 brake system...... 103 mounting points...... 210 Cigarette lighter socket...... 190 electric parking brake...... 107 safety grille...... 213 front seat...... 191 emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 103 safety net...... 211 rear seat...... 191 emergency brake light, EBL...... 79 filling brake fluid...... 230 Cargo cover...... 214 City Safety™...... 162 07 symbols in the combined instrument Car upholstery...... 265 Cleaning panel...... 103 Car wash...... 263 automatic car washes...... 263 car wash...... 263 Built-in phone...... 197 Catalytic converter...... 207 rims...... 264 Bulbs, see Lighting...... 231 recovery...... 222 seatbelts...... 265 Centre console...... 116 upholstery...... 265 Chassis settings...... 151 Clean Zone Interior...... 122

278 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 279 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Climate control...... 121 D Driving with a trailer general...... 121 towball load...... 269 sensors...... 121 DAB, menu structure...... 145 towing capacity...... 269 Clock, setting...... 69 DAB Radio...... 143 DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 150 Collision...... 31 Deadlocks...... 53 Collision warning...... 167 deactivation...... 53 temporary deactivation...... 53 E Collision warning system Defroster...... 125 radar sensor...... 156, 162, 167 ECC, electronic climate control...... 124 Diesel...... 208 Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...... 167 Economical driving...... 204 Diesel particle filter...... 208 Colour code, paint...... 266 ECO pressure...... 261 Direction indicators...... 80 Combined instrument panel...... 118 Electrical socket Comfort inside the passenger compart- Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 101 cargo area...... 191 ment...... 189 Display lighting...... 77 front seat...... 191 Compass...... 149 Distance Alert...... 159 rear seat...... 191 calibration...... 149 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 133 Electric parking brake...... 107 setting the zone...... 149 low battery voltage...... 107 Door mirrors...... 90 Condensation in headlamps...... 263 releasing automatically...... 108 Driveable punctured tyres...... 254 releasing manually...... 108 Controls Driver Alert Control...... 173 Emergency calls...... 197 centre console...... 116 07 Driver Alert System...... 173 Crash, see Collision...... 31 Emergency equipment Driving...... 204 warning triangle...... 215 Cruise control...... 152 cooling system...... 204 Emergency puncture repair...... 257 Curtain with the tailgate open...... 204 Emissions of carbon dioxide...... 209 panorama roof...... 93 with trailer...... 216 Driving in water...... 204

279 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 280 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Engine F Fuse table overheating...... 216 fuses in cargo area...... 249 starting...... 95 Fan...... 124 fuses in engine compartment...... 245 Engine block heater Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 164, 170 fuel-driven...... 129 Floor mats...... 190 G Engine braking, automatic...... 105 FM, menu structure...... 143 Engine compartment Fog lamp Gearbox...... 98 coolant...... 229 front...... 79 automatic...... 98 oil...... 228 Fog lamps manual...... 98 overview...... 226 rear...... 79 Gear selector inhibitor...... 100 power steering fluid...... 230 Fog lamps, on/off...... 79 Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- Engine oil...... 227, 272 gagement...... 101 adverse driving conditions...... 272 Foot brake...... 103 capacities...... 272 FOUR-C – Active chassis...... 151 Geartronic...... 99 filter...... 228 Fuel...... 207 Glass oil grade...... 272 fuel consumption...... 209 laminated/reinforced...... 89 Error messages fuel economy...... 261, 262 Global opening...... 121 Driver Alert Control...... 174 fuel filter...... 208 Glovebox...... 190 Lane Departure Warning...... 177 Fuse box...... 243 locking...... 50 see Messages and symbols...... 157 glovebox...... 247 07 Gross vehicle weight...... 269 Error messages in BLIS...... 187 Fuses...... 243 Error messages in Distance Alert...... 160 box in cargo area...... 249 Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con- changing...... 243 H trol...... 157 general...... 243 relay/fuse box in engine compart- Expectant mothers, seatbelt...... 17 Hazard warning flashers...... 80 ment...... 244 External dimensions...... 269 HBS – Heart Beat Sensor...... 45

280 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 281 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

HDC...... 105 I J Headlamp levelling...... 77 Active Xenon headlamps...... 77 IAQS – Interior Air Quality System...... 122 Jack...... 255 Headlamp pattern, adjusting...... 82 IC – Inflatable Curtain...... 26 Headlamps...... 231 IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem...... 199 K Headphones socket...... 134 Ignition keys...... 70 Head restraint Kerb weight...... 269 centre seat, rear...... 74 IMEI number...... 199 Key...... 42 lowering...... 74 Immobiliser...... 42 Key blade...... 45 Heated washer nozzles...... 87 Indicator lamps, PCC...... 44 Keyless drive...... 48, 95 Heating...... 125 Information and warning symbols...... 66 Keyless start (keyless drive)...... 48, 95 rearview and door mirrors...... 91 Information button, PCC...... 44 Keylock...... 100 rear window...... 91 Information displays...... 65 seats...... 124 Keypad in the steering Instrument lighting, see Lighting...... 77 wheel...... 76, 116, 152, 197 High engine temperature...... 216 Instrument overview Key positions...... 70 High-pressure headlamp washing...... 87 left-hand drive...... 62 Hill Descent Control...... 105 right-hand drive...... 64 HomeLink EU...... 110 Instruments and controls...... 62 L Home safe lighting...... 82 Interior lighting, see Lighting...... 80 07 Laminated glass...... 89 Hoot...... 76 Interior rearview mirror...... 92 Lamps, see Lighting...... 231 Horn...... 76 automatic dimming...... 92 Lane Departure Control...... 176 Intermittent wiping...... 86 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 265 iPod, connection...... 137

281 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 282 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Lighting...... 231 Loading Menu structure Active Xenon Lights, ABL...... 78 cargo area...... 210 DAB...... 145 approach light, duration...... 82 general...... 210 FM...... 143 automatic lighting, passenger compart- mounting points...... 210 Messages and symbols ment...... 81 roof load...... 214 Collision Warning with Auto bulbs, specifications...... 237 Locking/unlocking Brake...... 165, 171 controls...... 80 inside...... 50 Distance Alert...... 160 display lighting...... 77 tailgate...... 43, 51 Driver Alert Control...... 174 front fog lamps...... 79 Locks Lane Departure Warning...... 177 headlamp levelling...... 77 automatic locking...... 50 Messages and symbols in the Adaptive home safe lighting...... 82 locking...... 50 cruise control...... 157 in passenger compartment...... 80 unlocking...... 50 instrument lighting...... 77 Messages in BLIS...... 187 main/dipped beam...... 77 Messages in the combined instrument position/parking lamps...... 78 M panel...... 119 rear fog lamp...... 79 Messages in the information display...... 150 Lighting, bulb replacement...... 231 Main/dipped beam, see Lightning...... 77 Meters in the combined instrument panel cargo area...... 236 Maintenance fuel gauge...... 66 courtesy lighting...... 236 rustproofing...... 264 speedometer...... 66 dipped beam halogen...... 232 tachometer...... 66 direction indicators...... 233 Making calls...... 193, 197 Misting...... 125 07 fog lamp...... 234 Manual gearbox...... 98 attending to the windows...... 121 main beam, Active Xenon lamps...... 233 towing and recovery...... 222 condensation in headlamps...... 263 main beam halogen...... 233 Manual gear positions (Geartronic)...... 99 remove with the air vents...... 127 number plate lighting...... 235 timer function...... 126 side marker lamps...... 234 Memory function in seats...... 73 vanity mirror...... 236 Menus and messages...... 116 Light switches...... 77

282 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 283 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Mobile phone Panorama roof messages...... 199 connect...... 195 curtain...... 93 on/off...... 197 handsfree...... 192 opening and closing...... 93 phone book...... 195 register phone...... 192 ventilation position...... 94 phone book, shortcut...... 195 MY KEY...... 134 Parking assistance...... 179 receiving a call...... 194 parking assistance sensors...... 181 register phone...... 192 ring signal...... 198 Parking brake...... 107 SIM card...... 200 O Parking heater...... 129 Phone book...... 198 battery and fuel...... 129 Oil, see also Engine oil...... 272 parking on a hill...... 129 Polishing...... 264 Oil level low...... 228 time setting...... 131 Position/parking lamps...... 78 Overheating...... 216 Particle filter...... 208 Power panorama roof...... 93 Passenger compartment...... 189 Power seat...... 72 P Passenger compartment filter...... 122 Power windows...... 89 Passenger compartment heater Puncture, see Tyres...... 255 PACOS...... 22 fuel-driven...... 129 Putting calls on hold...... 198 PACOS, switch...... 22 PCC – Personal Car Communicator functions...... 43 Paintwork range...... 44, 45 colour code...... 266 R damage and touch-up...... 266 Petrol grade...... 207 07 Radar sensor...... 153 Panel lighting...... 77 Phone limitations...... 156 built-in, overview...... 197 Panic function...... 43 connect...... 195 Rain sensor...... 86 handsfree...... 192 Rear bulbs incoming calls...... 193 location...... 235 making calls...... 193

283 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 284 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Rear control panel battery replacement...... 47 Seatbelt audio system...... 134 detachable key blade...... 42 rear seat...... 17 Rearview and door mirrors functions...... 43 seatbelt tensioner...... 18 compass...... 149 range...... 44 Seatbelt reminder...... 17 door...... 90 Remote control system, type approval.... 276 Seatbelts...... 16 electrically retractable...... 91 Resetting the door mirrors...... 91 Seats...... 72 heating...... 91 Resetting the power windows...... 90 head restraints, rear...... 74 interior...... 92 Retractable power door mirrors...... 91 heating...... 124 Rear window, defrosting...... 91 lowering the front backrest...... 72 Reverse gear inhibitor...... 98 Recirculation...... 126 lowering the rear backrest...... 74 Rims Recommendations during driving...... 204 power seats...... 72 cleaning...... 264 Recommended child seats, table...... 33 Securing loads (Loading)...... 210 Roll-over protection...... 29 Recovery...... 223 Service programme...... 226 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)...... 29 Refrigerant...... 121 Set time interval...... 159 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll- Side airbags...... 24 Refuelling...... 206 over protection)...... 29 fuel cap...... 206 Signal input, external...... 133 Rustproofing...... 264 fuel filler flap, electrical opening...... 206 SIM card...... 200 fuel filler flap, manual opening...... 206 SIPS bag – decal...... 25 refuelling...... 206 S SIPS bags...... 24 07 Relay/fuse box: see Fuses...... 243 Soot filter...... 209 Remote control Safety grille...... 213 SOOT FILTER FULL...... 209 programmable...... 110 Safety mode...... 31 Spare wheel...... 255 Remote control, see Remote control key. . 42 Safety net...... 211 temporary spare...... 255 Remote control key...... 42 Seat, see Seats...... 72 battery...... 43 Spin control...... 150

284 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 285 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

Spin control function...... 150 Symbols and messages Towing...... 222 SRS AIRBAG...... 20, 21 Collision Warning with Auto towing eye...... 222 Brake...... 165, 171 SRS system...... 19 Towing capacity...... 269 Distance Alert...... 160 switch...... 22 Towing equipment...... 217 Driver Alert Control...... 174 specifications...... 218 SST – Self Supporting run flat Tyres...... 254 Lane Departure Warning...... 177 Towing eye...... 222 Stability and traction control system...... 150 Symbols and messages in the Adaptive Stability system...... 150 cruise control...... 157 TPMS – Tyre Pressure Monitoring...... 253 Stains...... 265 Trailer...... 216 cable...... 216 Start assistance...... 97 T driving with a trailer...... 216 Steering force, speed related...... 151 snaking...... 220 Steering force level, see Steering force... 151 Tailgate...... 52 Trailer Stability Assist...... 220 locking/unlocking...... 43, 51 Steering lock...... 96 Transmission...... 98 open...... 52 Steering wheel...... 76 Trip computer...... 147 keypad...... 76, 116, 133, 152, 197 Temperature Trip meter...... 69 keypad, adaptive cruise control...... 154 actual temperature...... 121 steering wheel adjustment...... 76 Temperature control...... 125 Type approved, remote control system... 276 Stone chips and scratches...... 266 Testing the alarm system...... 58 Type designation...... 267 Storage spaces in the passenger compart- Timer...... 126 Tyres direction of rotation...... 251 07 ment...... 189 Tools...... 255 driving characteristics...... 251 Surround...... 133 Total airing function...... 44, 121 maintenance...... 251 Symbols...... 150 Towball pressure...... 261 indicator symbols...... 66 installation...... 218 puncture repair...... 257 information symbols...... 66 removal...... 220 specifications...... 261 warning symbols...... 66 Towbar, see Towing equipment...... 217 speed ratings...... 261

285 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 286 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

tread wear indicators...... 252 W Waxing...... 264 tyre pressure monitoring...... 253 Weights winter tyres...... 252 Warning lamp kerb weight...... 269 adaptive cruise control...... 153 Wheels collision warning system...... 167 changing...... 255 stability and traction control system. . 150 U installation...... 256 Warning lamps rims...... 252 Unlocking airbags SRS...... 67 snow chains...... 253 from the inside...... 50 alternator not charging...... 67 spare wheel...... 255 from the outside...... 50 fault in brake system...... 67 Wheels and tyres...... 251 USB, connection...... 137 low oil pressure...... 67 parking brake applied...... 67 Whiplash injury...... 27 seatbelt reminder...... 67 Whiplash injury, WHIPS...... 27 V warning...... 67 WHIPS Warning sound child seat/booster cushion...... 27 Vanity mirror...... 81, 191 collision warning system...... 167 whiplash injury...... 27 Ventilation...... 122 Warning symbol, AIRBAG system...... 19 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 89 Vibration damper...... 217 Warning triangle...... 215 Windscreen washing...... 87 Washer fluid, filling...... 239 Windscreen wipers...... 86 Washer nozzles, heated...... 87 rain sensor...... 86 07 Washers Winter driving...... 205 rear window...... 87 Winter tyres...... 252 washer fluid, filling...... 239 Wiper blades...... 238 windscreen...... 87 changing...... 238 Water and dirt-repellent coating...... 89 cleaning...... 239 Water-repellent surface, cleaning...... 264

286 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 287 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

replacing, rear window...... 239 service position...... 238 Wipers and washing...... 86

287 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T08:57:49+02:00; Page 288 evastarck

07 Alphabetical Index

288 XC60 (Y413); 9; 3 2008-06-25T09:01:09+02:00; Page 1 evastarck

OWNERSVOLVO XC60 MANUAL

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%+%&:c\a^h]!6I%-(*!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc